← SSC archive
Paper archive

SSC CGL 2020 · 2021-08-16 · Shift 1

Archived paper and answer key. This is not a currently hosted official SSC key.

100 question cards · 1 paper · No sign-in needed
Question 1archived

The sequence of folding a piece of paper and the manner in which the folded paper has been cut is shown in the following figures. How would this paper look when unfolded?

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
C. Option C (shown in image)

The paper when unfolded will appear as shown below: Hence, ‘ option 3 ’ is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 2archived

Four words have been given, out of which three are alike in some manner and one is different. Select the word that is different.

  1. A
    Envy
  2. B
    Hatred
  3. C
    Empathy
  4. D
    Jealousy
Show answer
C. Empathy

Understanding the Question: Identifying the Odd Word Out The question asks us to identify the word that is different from the other three among the given four words: Envy, Hatred, Empathy, and Jealousy. This type of question tests our vocabulary and understanding of the relationships between words. Analyzing the Given Words Let's look at the meaning of each word: Envy: A feeling of discontent or covetousness with regard to another's possessions, qualities, or luck. It's a negative emotion. Hatred: Intense dislike or ill will towards someone or something. This is also a strong negative emotion. Empathy: The ability to understand and share the feelings of another. This involves connecting with someone else's emotional state. Jealousy: The feeling or show of envy, fear, or resentment of another person's status, possessions, or advantages. Similar to envy, it's often a negative emotion directed towards others. Identifying the Pattern Now let's group the words based on their meanings and typical emotional context. Envy, Hatred, and Jealousy are all emotions that are generally considered negative. They often involve feelings of ill will, resentment, or dislike towards other people or their circumstances. Empathy, on the other hand, is about understanding and relating to the feelings of others. While experiencing empathy might involve feeling sad if the other person is sad, the core concept of empathy itself is about connection and understanding, not necessarily a negative feeling directed towards others. We can see that Envy, Hatred, and Jealousy share a common theme of negative feelings, often directed outwardly or arising from comparison with others. Empathy represents a different type of emotional state – one of understanding and connection. Word Type of Emotion/Feeling Envy Negative, often directed towards others' possessions/qualities Hatred Strongly Negative, intense dislike Empathy Understanding and sharing others' feelings (connection) Jealousy Negative, involving envy, fear, or resentment regarding others' status/possessions Conclusion: Why Empathy is Different Based on the analysis, Envy, Hatred, and Jealousy fall into the category of negative emotions, often related to ill will or discontent arising from interaction or comparison with others. Empathy stands apart as it represents the capacity for understanding and sharing the feelings of another person, focusing on emotional connection rather than negativity towards them. Therefore, Empathy is the word that is different from the other three. Revision Table: Key Terms Term Brief Explanation Envy Wanting what others have. Hatred Strong dislike. Empathy Understanding others' feelings. Jealousy Negative feelings about others' advantages (often includes envy). Additional Information: Exploring Related Concepts Understanding emotions and their nuances is key to solving such verbal reasoning problems. Here are a few related concepts: Sympathy: While similar to empathy, sympathy is feeling pity or sorrow for someone else's misfortune. Empathy is more about feeling *with* them, stepping into their shoes. Antonyms: Words with opposite meanings. For example, love is an antonym for hatred. Compassion is closely related to empathy. Synonyms: Words with similar meanings. Envy and jealousy are often used synonymously, though they have subtle differences. Emotional Intelligence: The ability to understand and manage your own emotions, and to understand and influence the emotions of others. Empathy is a key component of emotional intelligence. Expanding your vocabulary and understanding how words relate to each other through synonyms, antonyms, categories (like positive vs. negative emotions), and context will greatly help in solving odd-one-out and analogy questions.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 3archived

Study the given pattern carefully and select the number that can replace the question mark (?) in it. 141613 186? 122117

  1. A
    6
  2. B
    8
  3. C
    5
  4. D
    7
Show answer
C. 5

The logic followed here is: In a row: [2nd number - (1st number ÷ 2)] + (multiply of digits of 1st number) = 3rd number Row 1: 14, 16, 13 = [16 - (14 ÷ 2)] + (1 × 4) = [16 - 7] + 4 = 9 + 4 = 13 Row 3: 12, 21, 17 = [21 - (12 ÷ 2)] + (1 × 2) = [21 - 6] + 2 = 15 + 2 = 17 Similarly, Row 2: 18, 6, ? = [6 - (18 ÷ 2)] + (1 ×8) = [6 - 9] + 8 = -3 + 8 = 5 Hence, the correct answer is "5".

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 4archived

Select the correct option that indicates the arrangement of the given words in the order in which they appear in an English dictionary. 1. Sorting 2. Solitary 3. Solution 4. Sophisticate 5. Solvent

  1. A
    2, 5, 3, 4, 1
  2. B
    2, 4, 1, 5, 3
  3. C
    2, 3, 1, 4, 5
  4. D
    2, 3, 5, 4, 1
Show answer
D. 2, 3, 5, 4, 1

Arranging Words in Dictionary Order To arrange words in the order they appear in an English dictionary, we compare them letter by letter from left to right. If the letters at a certain position are the same, we move to the next letter. The word with the letter that comes earlier in the alphabet is placed first. Let's look at the given words: Sorting Solitary Solution Sophisticate Solvent Step-by-Step Dictionary Order Arrangement We will compare the words letter by letter: All words start with 'S'. All words continue with 'o'. Now, let's look at the third letter: Sorting: 'r' Solitary: 'l' Solution: 'l' Sophisticate: 'p' Solvent: 'l' In the alphabet, 'l' comes before 'p' and 'r'. So, words 2 (Solitary), 3 (Solution), and 5 (Solvent) will come before words 1 (Sorting) and 4 (Sophisticate). Let's order Solitary, Solution, and Solvent. They all start with 'Sol'. We look at the fourth letter: Solitary: 'i' Solution: 'u' Solvent: 'v' Comparing 'i', 'u', and 'v', the order in the alphabet is 'i', then 'u', then 'v'. So, the order is Solitary (2), then Solution (3), then Solvent (5). Now let's order the remaining words, Sophisticate (4) and Sorting (1). Both start with 'So'. The third letters are 'p' and 'r'. Sophisticate: 'p' Sorting: 'r' In the alphabet, 'p' comes before 'r'. So, Sophisticate (4) comes before Sorting (1). Combining the ordered groups, the final arrangement in dictionary order is: Solitary (2) Solution (3) Solvent (5) Sophisticate (4) Sorting (1) The correct sequence of the original numbers is 2, 3, 5, 4, 1. Original Number Word Dictionary Order Final Sequence 2 Solitary 1st 2 3 Solution 2nd 3 5 Solvent 3rd 5 4 Sophisticate 4th 4 1 Sorting 5th 1 The sequence corresponding to the dictionary order arrangement is 2, 3, 5, 4, 1. Revision Table: Dictionary Ordering Concept Description Dictionary Order Arranging words alphabetically based on letter-by-letter comparison. Letter Comparison Start comparing words from the first letter. If they match, move to the next letter. Alphabetical Priority The word with the letter that appears earlier in the alphabet at the first point of difference comes first. Handling Same Prefixes If words share a common prefix, continue comparing the letters immediately following the prefix. Additional Information: Alphabetical Arrangement Basics Understanding alphabetical order is fundamental for using dictionaries, indexes, and sorted lists. The English alphabet consists of 26 letters, arranged from A to Z. When arranging words: Uppercase and lowercase letters are typically treated the same (e.g., 'Apple' comes before 'Banana'). Spaces and punctuation are usually ignored or handled by specific rules depending on the context (e.g., in indexing). Short words with common beginnings come before longer words that start with the same sequence of letters followed by more letters (e.g., 'Car' comes before 'Carpet'). This is because after 'r' in 'Car', there are no more letters, which is treated as coming before any letter in 'Carpet' after 'r'. Practicing with different sets of words helps improve speed and accuracy in dictionary ordering tasks.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 5archived

Four letter-clusters have been given, out of which three are alike in some manner and one is different. Select the letter-cluster that is different.

  1. A
    RTPO
  2. B
    LNJI
  3. C
    DFBA
  4. D
    FHDB
Show answer
D. FHDB

Convert letters to positions (A=1 … Z=26) and check the pattern of consecutive differences. RTPO: 18, 20, 16, 15 → +2, −4, −1 LNJI: 12, 14, 10, 9 → +2, −4, −1 DFBA: 4, 6, 2, 1 → +2, −4, −1 FHDB: 6, 8, 4, 2 → +2, −4, −2 RTPO, LNJI and DFBA all follow +2, −4, −1. FHDB breaks the pattern with −2 at the last step. Hence FHDB is the odd cluster out.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 6archived

Select the option that is related to the third number in the same way as the second number is related to the first number. 16 : 144 :: 28 : ?

  1. A
    420
  2. B
    364
  3. C
    263
  4. D
    544
Show answer
A. 420

Number Analogy Solution: 16 to 144, 28 to What? This question asks us to find the number that relates to 28 in the same way that 144 relates to 16. This type of problem is known as a number analogy. We need to discover the pattern or rule connecting the first pair of numbers (16 and 144) and then apply that same rule to the third number (28) to find the missing fourth number. Identifying the Pattern between 16 and 144 Let's look closely at the numbers 16 and 144. We need to find a mathematical relationship between them. Possible relationships could involve addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, squares, cubes, or a combination of these operations. Is it addition/subtraction? $144 - 16 = 128$. Adding 128 to 28 gives $28 + 128 = 156$. This is not in the options. Is it multiplication? $16 \times 9 = 144$. So, 144 is 16 multiplied by 9. Now, let's consider how 9 might be related to 16. Could 9 be derived from 16 using a simple rule? Let's try some common operations: $16 / 2 = 8$. If we add 1 to 8, we get 9. So, the multiplier could be $(\text{First Number} / 2) + 1$. Let's test this rule with the first pair: Multiplier for 16 = $(16 / 2) + 1 = 8 + 1 = 9$. Applying this multiplier: $16 \times 9 = 144$. This rule seems to fit the relationship between 16 and 144 perfectly. The pattern is: The second number is obtained by multiplying the first number by (half of the first number plus one). Mathematically, the relationship is: $\text{Second Number} = \text{First Number} \times \left( \frac{\text{First Number}}{2} + 1 \right)$. Applying the Pattern to Find the Missing Number for 28 Now we apply the same rule to the number 28 to find the missing fourth number in the analogy 28 : ?. Let the missing number be $X$. According to our pattern: $X = 28 \times \left( \frac{28}{2} + 1 \right)$ First, calculate the value inside the parentheses: $\frac{28}{2} = 14$ $14 + 1 = 15$ So, the multiplier for 28 is 15. Now, multiply 28 by 15 to find $X$: $X = 28 \times 15$ Let's calculate $28 \times 15$: $28 \times 15 = 28 \times (10 + 5)$ $= (28 \times 10) + (28 \times 5)$ $= 280 + 140$ $= 420$ So, the missing number is 420. Checking the Options We found the missing number to be 420. Let's check the given options: 420 364 263 544 Our calculated number, 420, matches the first option. Conclusion for the Number Analogy The relationship 16 : 144 follows the rule where the second number is the first number multiplied by (half of the first number plus one). Applying this rule to 28 gives us 420. Therefore, the correct analogy is 16 : 144 :: 28 : 420. Revision Table: Number Analogy First Pair Second Pair Relationship 16 : 144 28 : ? Second No. = First No. $\times$ (First No. / 2 + 1) Verification: $16 \times (16/2 + 1) = 16 \times (8 + 1) = 16 \times 9 = 144$ Calculation: $28 \times (28/2 + 1) = 28 \times (14 + 1) = 28 \times 15 = 420$ Consistent Pattern Application Additional Information: Solving Number Series and Analogies Number analogy and series problems are common in logical reasoning tests. They require you to identify the underlying pattern. Here are some common patterns to look for: Arithmetic Progression: Adding or subtracting a constant value. Geometric Progression: Multiplying or dividing by a constant value. Differences/Ratios: Looking at the differences or ratios between consecutive terms. These differences/ratios might form their own pattern (e.g., an arithmetic or geometric progression). Squares and Cubes: Numbers might be squares or cubes, or related to squares/cubes ($\text{n}^2$, $\text{n}^2 \pm \text{k}$, $\text{n}^3$, $\text{n}^3 \pm \text{k}$). Product/Sum of Digits: The next number might be related to the sum or product of the digits of the previous number. Alternating Patterns: Different rules might apply to alternate numbers in the series or pairs in the analogy. Combination of Operations: As seen in this problem, a combination of arithmetic operations can form the pattern. Solving these problems often involves trial and error, trying different common patterns until one fits consistently.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 7archived

Select the boxes that can be formed by folding the given sheet along the lines.

Question figureQuestion figure
  1. A
    Only A and C
  2. B
    Only B and C
  3. C
    Only C and D
  4. D
    Only A, C and D
Show answer
A. Only A and C

The faces that will be opposite to each other when the paper is folded to form a cube is shown below: The Opposite of 2 is 4. The Opposite of 6 is 1. The Opposite of 3 is 5. → Can be formed. → Cannot be formed as 4 and 2 are faces opposite to each other and no two opposite faces can appear together in a dice. → Can be formed. → Cannot be formed as 5 and 3 are faces opposite to each other and no two opposite faces can appear together in a dice. The dice A and C can be formed when the given sheet is folded because the opposite faces is not appear together in these dice. Hence, ‘ Only A and C ’ is the correct answer. Additional Information Dices are of two types : Standard Dice Non-Standard Dice. Dice has:- faces = 6 sides = 12 corners = 8 Two opposite faces are never seen together. Adjacent faces are never the opposite of each other.

Solution figureSolution figureSolution figureSolution figureSolution figureSolution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 8archived

Select the figure from among the given options that can replace the question mark (?) in the following series.

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
C. Option C (shown in image)

Given: The logic follows here is: (1) All the signs are rotating in the anticlockwise direction within the square. (2) In every step, alternate signs are changing. Therefore, by checking options only option (3) follows above conditions. In all the other options one sign that should be changed is the repeated sign from the previous steps, it should not be repeated. The complete series is: Hence, option (3) is the correct answer.

Solution figureSolution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 9archived

How many triangles are there in the given figure?

Question figure
  1. A
    18
  2. B
    16
  3. C
    15
  4. D
    17
Show answer
D. 17

The number of triangles in the figure is shown below: Hence, ' 17 ' is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 10archived

In a certain code language, 'FRENCH' is coded as '114' and 'LOSS' is coded as '47'. How will 'COURSE' be coded in that language?

  1. A
    87
  2. B
    120
  3. C
    81
  4. D
    103
Show answer
A. 87

Solving the Coding Decoding Puzzle: Finding the Code for COURSE This question involves a coding-decoding pattern where words are coded into numerical values. We need to decipher the logic applied to 'FRENCH' and 'LOSS' to find the code for 'COURSE'. Analyzing the Coding Pattern for FRENCH and LOSS Let's assign numerical values to the letters based on their position in the English alphabet (A=1, B=2, ..., Z=26). Word: FRENCH Letters: F, R, E, N, C, H Original Alphabetical Values: 6, 18, 5, 14, 3, 8 The sum of original values is $6 + 18 + 5 + 14 + 3 + 8 = 54$. This does not match the code 114. Let's try the reverse alphabetical values (A=26, B=25, ..., Z=1), where the reverse value is $27 - \text{original value}$. Reverse Alphabetical Values: F: $27 - 6 = 21$ R: $27 - 18 = 9$ E: $27 - 5 = 22$ N: $27 - 14 = 13$ C: $27 - 3 = 24$ H: $27 - 8 = 19$ The sum of reverse alphabetical values is $21 + 9 + 22 + 13 + 24 + 19 = 108$. The given code for FRENCH is 114. The number of letters in FRENCH is 6. Observe that $108 + 6 = 114$. It seems the code might be the sum of the reverse alphabetical values plus the number of letters in the word. Word: LOSS Let's test this pattern with 'LOSS'. Letters: L, O, S, S Original Alphabetical Values: 12, 15, 19, 19 Reverse Alphabetical Values: L: $27 - 12 = 15$ O: $27 - 15 = 12$ S: $27 - 19 = 8$ S: $27 - 19 = 8$ The sum of reverse alphabetical values is $15 + 12 + 8 + 8 = 43$. The given code for LOSS is 47. The number of letters in LOSS is 4. Observe that $43 + 4 = 47$. This matches the given code. The pattern is confirmed: Code = (Sum of reverse alphabetical values of letters) + (Number of letters in the word). Coding the Word COURSE Now, let's apply this pattern to find the code for 'COURSE'. Letters: C, O, U, R, S, E Original Alphabetical Values: 3, 15, 21, 18, 19, 5 Calculate the reverse alphabetical values: C: $27 - 3 = 24$ O: $27 - 15 = 12$ U: $27 - 21 = 6$ R: $27 - 18 = 9$ S: $27 - 19 = 8$ E: $27 - 5 = 22$ Sum of reverse alphabetical values: $24 + 12 + 6 + 9 + 8 + 22 = 81$. Number of letters in COURSE is 6. Applying the coding pattern: Code for COURSE = (Sum of reverse alphabetical values) + (Number of letters) Code for COURSE = $81 + 6 = 87$. Final Answer The code for 'COURSE' in this language is 87. Word Original Values Reverse Values Sum of Reverse Values Number of Letters Code (Sum of Reverse Values + Number of Letters) Given Code FRENCH 6, 18, 5, 14, 3, 8 21, 9, 22, 13, 24, 19 108 6 $108 + 6 = 114$ 114 LOSS 12, 15, 19, 19 15, 12, 8, 8 43 4 $43 + 4 = 47$ 47 COURSE 3, 15, 21, 18, 19, 5 24, 12, 6, 9, 8, 22 81 6 $81 + 6 = 87$ ? Coding Decoding Revision Table Concept Description How applied here Letter Values Assigning numerical values to letters based on alphabetical order (A=1, B=26, etc.). Used both standard (A=1) and reverse (A=26) values. Pattern Identification Analyzing given examples (FRENCH, LOSS) to find a consistent rule. Discovered the rule: sum of reverse values + number of letters. Applying the Rule Using the identified pattern to solve for the unknown word (COURSE). Calculated the code for COURSE using the established formula. Additional Information on Coding Decoding Coding-decoding questions are common in logical reasoning tests. They assess your ability to identify patterns and rules. Common patterns include: Letter to Letter Coding: Letters are shifted, replaced, or rearranged. Letter to Number Coding: Letters are assigned numerical values based on position, sum of positions, etc. Word to Word Coding: Words are coded as other words based on a specific rule (e.g., synonyms, antonyms, or a hidden letter/number pattern). Mixed Coding: A combination of letter, number, and symbol coding. To solve these puzzles, always start by analyzing the relationship between the original word/number and its code. Look for consistent transformations across the given examples.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 11archived

Select the Venn diagram that best illustrates the relationship between the following classes. Coriander seeds, Spices, Cinnamon

  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
D. Option D (shown in image)

The Venn diagram that best illustrates the relationship between Coriander seeds, Spices, and Cinnamon is shown below: Coriander and Cinnamon are spices. Hence, ‘ option 4 ’ is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 12archived

Select the option in which the words share the same relationship as that shared by the given pair of words. Anger : Emotion

  1. A
    Bicycle : Road
  2. B
    Mattress : Bed
  3. C
    Television : Entertainment
  4. D
    Pomegranate : Fruit
Show answer
D. Pomegranate : Fruit

Understanding Word Analogies: Anger and Emotion Word analogies test your ability to identify the relationship between a pair of words and find another pair that shares the same relationship. In the given pair, "Anger : Emotion", we need to determine the connection between these two words. Identifying the Relationship in "Anger : Emotion" Let's analyse the relationship between "Anger" and "Emotion": Anger is a specific feeling or state of mind. Emotion is a broad category of feelings. Therefore, "Anger" is a specific type or example of an "Emotion". The relationship is that of a specific member to its broader category. Analyzing the Options Now, let's examine each option provided and see which one exhibits the same member-to-category relationship: Option 1: Bicycle : Road A Bicycle is a vehicle. A Road is a surface used for travel. A bicycle is used on a road. This is a relationship of usage or location, not a member-to-category relationship like Anger is to Emotion. So, this option does not match. Option 2: Mattress : Bed A Mattress is a soft pad used for sleeping. A Bed is a piece of furniture, often containing a mattress, springs, and a frame. A mattress is a part of a bed. This is a part-to-whole relationship, not a member-to-category relationship. So, this option does not match. Option 3: Television : Entertainment A Television is an electronic device. Entertainment is the activity of providing or being provided with amusement or enjoyment. A television is a source of entertainment. This is a relationship between an object and its purpose or output, not a member-to-category relationship. So, this option does not match. Option 4: Pomegranate : Fruit A Pomegranate is a specific type of edible plant product. Fruit is a broader category of edible plant products, typically sweet and containing seeds. A pomegranate is a specific type or example of a fruit. This relationship is exactly the same as the relationship between Anger and Emotion: specific member to broader category. Conclusion Comparing the relationships, the pair "Pomegranate : Fruit" shares the same member-to-category relationship as "Anger : Emotion". Revision Table: Analogy Relationships Word Pair Relationship Type Explanation Anger : Emotion Member : Category Anger is a specific type of Emotion. Bicycle : Road Usage / Location Bicycle is used on a Road. Mattress : Bed Part : Whole Mattress is part of a Bed. Television : Entertainment Source : Purpose / Output Television provides Entertainment. Pomegranate : Fruit Member : Category Pomegranate is a specific type of Fruit. Additional Information: Types of Analogies Understanding common types of word analogies can help solve these questions faster. Some common types include: Part to Whole: e.g., Finger : Hand Member to Category: e.g., Sparrow : Bird Cause and Effect: e.g., Rain : Flood Purpose/Function: e.g., Knife : Cut Synonyms: e.g., Happy : Joyful Antonyms: e.g., Hot : Cold Worker and Tool: e.g., Writer : Pen Action and Object: e.g., Read : Book By identifying the relationship in the given pair, you can then systematically evaluate the options to find the matching analogy.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 13archived

Select the option that is embedded in the given figure (rotation is NOT allowed).

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
C. Option C (shown in image)

Important Points Do not get tensed by the complexity of the figures. Carefully understand the structure of the given question figure. The embedded figure may not be of exact size. It may be small or big. Sometimes the rotation or reflection of the figures may be confusing. So think wisely before selecting the answer. The option that is embedded in the given figure when rotation is NOT allowed is shown below: Hence, ‘ option 3 ’ is the correct answer.

Solution figureSolution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 14archived

Select the correct mirror image of the given combination when the mirror is placed at MN as shown.

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
B. Option B (shown in image)

The correct mirror image of the given combination when the mirror is placed at MN is shown below: Hence, ‘ option 2 ’ is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 15archived

In a certain code language, 'PRINT' is written as 'YMNIU'. How will 'MAGIC' be written in that language?

  1. A
    HRLRZ
  2. B
    HLDRV
  3. C
    HRLZR
  4. D
    HDLVR
Show answer
C. HRLZR

The correct answer is HRLZR. Once you identify a potential pattern from the example, apply it to the word you need to code. If the result matches one of the options, that's likely the correct pattern. If not, re-examine the example for a different logic. Practice with various types of coding-decoding questions helps improve pattern recognition skills.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 16archived

Which two numbers should be interchanged to make the given equation correct? 36 × 81 ÷ 9 – (88 ÷ 4) + 14 + (22 + 7) = 169

  1. A
    14 and 22
  2. B
    9 and 36
  3. C
    36 and 14
  4. D
    81 and 36
Show answer
C. 36 and 14

Solving Equation by Interchanging Numbers The problem asks us to find which pair of numbers, when swapped in the given equation, makes the equation true. The given equation is: 36 × 81 ÷ 9 – (88 ÷ 4) + 14 + (22 + 7) = 169 To solve this, we will test each option by interchanging the specified numbers and then evaluating the equation using the order of operations (BODMAS/PEMDAS). The order of operations is: Brackets (Parentheses), Orders (Exponents, Roots), Division and Multiplication (from left to right), Addition and Subtraction (from left to right). Let's evaluate the original equation first to see if it's already correct: Calculate inside brackets: $88 \div 4 = 22$ and $22 + 7 = 29$. Equation becomes: $36 \times 81 \div 9 - 22 + 14 + 29$. Perform multiplication and division from left to right: $36 \times 81 = 2916$, then $2916 \div 9 = 324$. Equation becomes: $324 - 22 + 14 + 29$. Perform addition and subtraction from left to right: $324 - 22 = 302$, then $302 + 14 = 316$, then $316 + 29 = 345$. The original equation evaluates to $345$, which is not equal to $169$. So, we need to interchange numbers. Let's test the given options: Testing Option 1: Interchange 14 and 22 The numbers 14 and 22 are swapped in the equation. New Equation: 36 × 81 ÷ 9 – (88 ÷ 4) + 22 + (14 + 7) = 169 Evaluation: Calculate inside brackets: $88 \div 4 = 22$ and $14 + 7 = 21$. Equation becomes: $36 \times 81 \div 9 - 22 + 22 + 21$. Perform multiplication and division: $36 \times 81 = 2916$, then $2916 \div 9 = 324$. Equation becomes: $324 - 22 + 22 + 21$. Perform addition and subtraction: $324 - 22 = 302$, then $302 + 22 = 324$, then $324 + 21 = 345$. Result: $345 = 169$. This is False. Option 1 is incorrect. Testing Option 2: Interchange 9 and 36 The numbers 9 and 36 are swapped in the equation. New Equation: 9 × 81 ÷ 36 – (88 ÷ 4) + 14 + (22 + 7) = 169 Evaluation: Calculate inside brackets: $88 \div 4 = 22$ and $22 + 7 = 29$. Equation becomes: $9 \times 81 \div 36 - 22 + 14 + 29$. Perform multiplication and division: $9 \times 81 = 729$, then $729 \div 36 = 20.25$. Equation becomes: $20.25 - 22 + 14 + 29$. Perform addition and subtraction: $20.25 - 22 = -1.75$, then $-1.75 + 14 = 12.25$, then $12.25 + 29 = 41.25$. Result: $41.25 = 169$. This is False. Option 2 is incorrect. Testing Option 3: Interchange 36 and 14 The numbers 36 and 14 are swapped in the equation. New Equation: 14 × 81 ÷ 9 – (88 ÷ 4) + 36 + (22 + 7) = 169 Evaluation: Calculate inside brackets: $88 \div 4 = 22$ and $22 + 7 = 29$. Equation becomes: $14 \times 81 \div 9 - 22 + 36 + 29$. Perform multiplication and division: $14 \times 81 = 1134$, then $1134 \div 9 = 126$. Equation becomes: $126 - 22 + 36 + 29$. Perform addition and subtraction: $126 - 22 = 104$, then $104 + 36 = 140$, then $140 + 29 = 169$. Result: $169 = 169$. This is True. Option 3 makes the equation correct. Testing Option 4: Interchange 81 and 36 The numbers 81 and 36 are swapped in the equation. New Equation: 36 × 36 ÷ 9 – (88 ÷ 4) + 14 + (22 + 7) = 169 Evaluation: Calculate inside brackets: $88 \div 4 = 22$ and $22 + 7 = 29$. Equation becomes: $36 \times 36 \div 9 - 22 + 14 + 29$. Perform multiplication and division: $36 \times 36 = 1296$, then $1296 \div 9 = 144$. Equation becomes: $144 - 22 + 14 + 29$. Perform addition and subtraction: $144 - 22 = 122$, then $122 + 14 = 136$, then $136 + 29 = 165$. Result: $165 = 169$. This is False. Option 4 is incorrect. Based on the evaluations, interchanging 36 and 14 is the correct option to make the given equation true. Revision Table: Equation Interchange Results Numbers Interchanged New Equation Resulting Value Correct? (Value = 169) None (Original) $36 \times 81 \div 9 - (88 \div 4) + 14 + (22 + 7)$ 345 No 14 and 22 $36 \times 81 \div 9 - (88 \div 4) + 22 + (14 + 7)$ 345 No 9 and 36 $9 \times 81 \div 36 - (88 \div 4) + 14 + (22 + 7)$ 41.25 No 36 and 14 $14 \times 81 \div 9 - (88 \div 4) + 36 + (22 + 7)$ 169 Yes 81 and 36 $36 \times 36 \div 9 - (88 \div 4) + 14 + (22 + 7)$ 165 No Additional Information: Order of Operations (BODMAS/PEMDAS) The order of operations is a set of rules that defines the sequence in which operations should be performed in a mathematical expression. This ensures that everyone gets the same result when evaluating an expression. Brackets (Parentheses) Orders (Exponents, Square Roots, etc.) Division and Multiplication (from left to right) Addition and Subtraction (from left to right) Sometimes remembered as PEMDAS: Parentheses Exponents Multiplication and Division (from left to right) Addition and Subtraction (from left to right) Applying this order is crucial for correctly evaluating expressions, especially when testing different number arrangements in equation solving problems like this one.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 17archived

Select the option that is related to the third word in the same way as the second word is related to the first word. Leaves : Rustle :: Owl : ?

  1. A
    Chirp
  2. B
    Hoot
  3. C
    Grunt
  4. D
    Quack
Show answer
B. Hoot

Understanding Analogies: Leaves, Rustle, Owl, Hoot This question is an analogy, which tests your ability to understand the relationship between a pair of words and apply that same relationship to another pair. The format "A : B :: C : D" means "A is to B as C is to D". You need to find the word that completes the second pair, maintaining the same relationship as the first pair. The first pair is Leaves : Rustle. We need to identify the relationship between these two words. What do leaves do? They make a sound. The sound that leaves make, especially when blown by the wind or stepped on, is called rustling. So, the relationship here is Thing : Sound Made By That Thing. Applying the Relationship to Owl Now we look at the third word, Owl. Following the pattern from the first pair, we need to find the sound made by an owl. We need to select from the given options the word that describes the sound an owl makes. Analyzing the Options Let's examine each option provided: Chirp: This is the sound made by small birds, like sparrows or crickets. It is not the sound an owl makes. Hoot: This is the characteristic sound made by owls. Owls are well-known for their hooting calls. Grunt: This is a low, rough sound typically made by animals like pigs or sometimes humans expressing effort or disapproval. It is not the sound an owl makes. Quack: This is the sound made by ducks. It is not the sound an owl makes. Identifying the Correct Sound for Owl Based on the analysis of the options and common knowledge about animal sounds, the sound made by an Owl is a Hoot. Therefore, the analogy is Leaves : Rustle :: Owl : Hoot. Conclusion The relationship in the first pair is Leaves make the sound Rustle. Applying the same relationship to the second pair, Owl makes the sound Hoot. Thus, Hoot correctly completes the analogy. Thing Sound Made By It Leaves Rustle Owl Hoot Revision Table: Analogy Review Here’s a quick summary to help remember this type of analogy: Understand the first pair (e.g., Leaves : Rustle). Identify the exact relationship (e.g., Object and its characteristic sound). Apply the same relationship to the third word (e.g., Owl). Find the word in the options that fits this relationship (e.g., Hoot is the sound of an Owl). Additional Information: Animal Sounds and Analogies Analogies often use common knowledge relationships like sounds animals make, functions of objects, parts of a whole, synonyms, antonyms, etc. Knowing different types of relationships can help solve analogy questions quickly. Examples of other animal sound analogies: Dog : Bark Cat : Meow Cow : Moo Lion : Roar Snake : Hiss Practicing identifying relationships in pairs of words is key to mastering analogy questions in verbal reasoning.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 18archived

What was the day of the week on 17 April 2014?

  1. A
    Friday
  2. B
    Wednesday
  3. C
    Saturday
  4. D
    Thursday
Show answer
D. Thursday

This solution explains how to determine the day of the week for a specific date, April 17, 2014, using a standard calendar calculation method. Understanding Calendar Calculations Determining the day of the week for any given date involves understanding how calendar days progress and accounting for leap years. A common method uses a mathematical formula that considers the day, month, year, century, and leap year rules. Choosing a Calculation Formula We will use a well-known algorithm to calculate the day of the week. The formula requires specific inputs derived from the date: The day of the month ($q$). A code for the month ($m$). The year, split into the last two digits ($K$) and the century ($J$). The formula is: $$ h = (q + \lfloor \frac{13(m+1)}{5} \rfloor + K + \lfloor \frac{K}{4} \rfloor + \lfloor \frac{J}{4} \rfloor - 2J) \mod 7 $$ Where: $q$ is the day of the month. $m$ is the month's code: March=3, April=4, May=5, ..., December=12. Importantly, January and February are treated as months 13 and 14 of the *previous* year for this formula's calculation sequence. $Y$ is the year. $J$ is the century ($\lfloor Y/100 \rfloor$). $K$ is the year of the century ($Y \mod 100$). $\lfloor x \rfloor$ denotes the floor function (the greatest integer less than or equal to $x$). $\mod 7$ means the remainder after dividing by 7. The result ($h$) maps to the day of the week as follows: 0 = Saturday, 1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, 3 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 5 = Thursday, 6 = Friday. Step-by-Step Calculation for April 17, 2014 Let's apply the formula to the date April 17, 2014: Identify the values: Day ($q$): $17$ Month ($m$): April corresponds to $4$. Year ($Y$): $2014$. Determine Century ($J$) and Year ($K$): Century $J = \lfloor 2014 / 100 \rfloor = 20$. Year $K = 2014 \mod 100 = 14$. Check for Month Adjustment: Since the month is April ($m=4$), it is not January or February, so we do not need to adjust the year $Y$. Calculate the terms in the formula: Term 1: $q = 17$. Term 2: $\lfloor \frac{13(m+1)}{5} \rfloor = \lfloor \frac{13(4+1)}{5} \rfloor = \lfloor \frac{13 \times 5}{5} \rfloor = \lfloor 13 \rfloor = 13$. Term 3: $K = 14$. Term 4: $\lfloor \frac{K}{4} \rfloor = \lfloor \frac{14}{4} \rfloor = \lfloor 3.5 \rfloor = 3$. Term 5: $\lfloor \frac{J}{4} \rfloor = \lfloor \frac{20}{4} \rfloor = \lfloor 5 \rfloor = 5$. Term 6: $-2J = -2 \times 20 = -40$. Substitute and calculate $h$: $$ h = (17 + 13 + 14 + 3 + 5 - 40) \mod 7 $$ $$ h = (52 - 40) \mod 7 $$ $$ h = 12 \mod 7 $$ $$ h = 5 $$ Final Day of the Week Determination The calculated value is $h=5$. Using the formula's mapping (0=Saturday, 1=Sunday, ..., 5=Thursday, 6=Friday), the value 5 corresponds to Thursday. Therefore, the day of the week on April 17, 2014, was Thursday.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 19archived

Select the letter-cluster from among the given options that can replace the question mark (?) in the following series THME, WKJB, ZNGY, CQDV, ?

  1. A
    FUAS
  2. B
    FTAS
  3. C
    FTAR
  4. D
    FTBS
Show answer
B. FTAS

Analyzing the Letter-Cluster Series Pattern The question asks us to find the next letter-cluster in the series: THME, WKJB, ZNGY, CQDV, ?. To solve this, we need to identify the pattern followed by the letters in each position across the series. Step-by-Step Pattern Analysis Let's examine the progression of letters in each position: First Letter Progression: T → W → Z → C → ? T is the 20th letter of the alphabet. W is the 23rd letter. Z is the 26th letter. C is the 3rd letter (after wrapping around from Z). The difference between consecutive letters is: W (23) - T (20) = +3 Z (26) - W (23) = +3 C (29, effectively 3 after Z) - Z (26) = +3 The pattern for the first letter is consistently adding 3 positions. Applying this to C (3rd letter): \(C + 3 = \text{3rd letter} + 3 = \text{6th letter}\) The 6th letter of the alphabet is F. So, the first letter of the next cluster is F. Second Letter Progression: H → K → N → Q → ? H is the 8th letter. K is the 11th letter. N is the 14th letter. Q is the 17th letter. The difference between consecutive letters is: K (11) - H (8) = +3 N (14) - K (11) = +3 Q (17) - N (14) = +3 The pattern for the second letter is also consistently adding 3 positions. Applying this to Q (17th letter): \(Q + 3 = \text{17th letter} + 3 = \text{20th letter}\) The 20th letter of the alphabet is T. So, the second letter of the next cluster is T. Third Letter Progression: M → J → G → D → ? M is the 13th letter. J is the 10th letter. G is the 7th letter. D is the 4th letter. The difference between consecutive letters is: J (10) - M (13) = -3 G (7) - J (10) = -3 D (4) - G (7) = -3 The pattern for the third letter is consistently subtracting 3 positions. Applying this to D (4th letter): \(D - 3 = \text{4th letter} - 3 = \text{1st letter}\) The 1st letter of the alphabet is A. So, the third letter of the next cluster is A. Fourth Letter Progression: E → B → Y → V → ? E is the 5th letter. B is the 2nd letter. Y is the 25th letter (wrapping around from B). V is the 22nd letter. The difference between consecutive letters is: B (2) - E (5) = -3 (or 26+2 - 5 = 28 - 5 = 23 mod 26 is -3) Y (25) - B (2) = -3 (or 2 - 3 = -1, which is Y, 25th letter) V (22) - Y (25) = -3 The pattern for the fourth letter is consistently subtracting 3 positions. Applying this to V (22nd letter): \(V - 3 = \text{22nd letter} - 3 = \text{19th letter}\) The 19th letter of the alphabet is S. So, the fourth letter of the next cluster is S. Forming the Next Cluster Combining the letters found for each position: First letter: F Second letter: T Third letter: A Fourth letter: S The next letter-cluster in the series is FTAS. Cluster 1st Letter 2nd Letter 3rd Letter 4th Letter THME T (20) H (8) M (13) E (5) WKJB W (23) K (11) J (10) B (2) ZNGY Z (26) N (14) G (7) Y (25) CQDV C (3) Q (17) D (4) V (22) ? F (6) T (20) A (1) S (19) The pattern is +3 for the first two letters and -3 for the last two letters, considering alphabetical order and wrapping around from Z to A. Conclusion Based on the identified pattern, the next letter-cluster in the series THME, WKJB, ZNGY, CQDV is FTAS. Revision Table: Letter Series Patterns Understanding different types of letter series patterns is crucial for solving such problems. Common patterns include: Adding or subtracting a constant number of positions (as seen in this problem). Adding or subtracting an increasing or decreasing number. Alternating addition and subtraction. Skipping letters based on a sequence (e.g., skipping one letter, then two, then three). Patterns involving vowels and consonants. Reversal of letters or specific positions. Additional Information: Solving Reasoning Series Reasoning series questions, whether involving letters, numbers, or alphanumeric combinations, test your pattern recognition and logical deduction skills. Here are some tips for solving them: Write down the alphabetical position of each letter to easily calculate differences. Look for patterns in the differences between consecutive terms. Check if the pattern is constant or changes in a predictable way. Consider patterns across positions within a term (e.g., first letter with first letter, second with second, etc.). Be mindful of wrapping around in letter series (A follows Z). Practice with various types of series to build familiarity with common patterns.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 20archived

‘A # B’ means ‘A is the son of B’. ‘A @ B’ means ‘A is the mother of B’. ‘A & B’ means ‘A is the wife of B’. ‘A % B’ means ‘A is the sister of B’. If ‘M @ R % K # G # N & T’, then which of the following statements is NOT correct?

  1. A
    T is the paternal grandfather of M.
  2. B
    N is the paternal grandmother of K.
  3. C
    M is the mother of K.
  4. D
    R is the daughter of G.
Show answer
A. T is the paternal grandfather of M.

Understanding the Blood Relation Coding This question involves decoding a relationship expression based on a set of defined symbols. We are given the meanings of four symbols: '#', '@', '&', and '%'. We need to apply these meanings to a specific string 'M @ R % K # G # N & T' and then evaluate the given statements to find the one that is NOT correct. Decoding the Symbols: ‘A # B’ means ‘A is the son of B’. ‘A @ B’ means ‘A is the mother of B’. ‘A & B’ means ‘A is the wife of B’. ‘A % B’ means ‘A is the sister of B’. Analyzing the Expression: M @ R % K # G # N & T Let's break down the expression segment by segment from left to right: M @ R: According to the definition, 'A @ B' means 'A is the mother of B'. So, 'M @ R' means M is the mother of R. This tells us M is female. R % K: According to the definition, 'A % B' means 'A is the sister of B'. So, 'R % K' means R is the sister of K. This tells us R is female. Since M is the mother of R, M is also the mother of K (as R and K are siblings). K # G: According to the definition, 'A # B' means 'A is the son of B'. So, 'K # G' means K is the son of G. This tells us K is male. We know M is the mother of K. Since K is the son of G, G must be the father of K. Therefore, M is the wife of G. G # N: According to the definition, 'A # B' means 'A is the son of B'. So, 'G # N' means G is the son of N. This tells us G is male. N & T: According to the definition, 'A & B' means 'A is the wife of B'. So, 'N & T' means N is the wife of T. This tells us N is female and T is male. Summary of Relationships Derived: M is the mother of R and K. (M is female) R is the sister of K. (R is female) K is the son of G. (K is male) G is the father of R and K, and husband of M. (G is male) G is the son of N. (G is male) N is the wife of T. (N is female) T is the husband of N. (T is male) From this, we can see the family structure: T and N are a couple. G is their son. G and M are a couple. K and R are their children. Evaluating the Statements: Now, let's examine each statement based on our derived relationships: Statement 1: T is the paternal grandfather of M. T is the father of G. G is the husband of M. T is M's father-in-law, not her paternal grandfather. Paternal grandfather is the father's father. M's father is not in this family tree (we only know her husband's family). Therefore, this statement is NOT correct. Statement 2: N is the paternal grandmother of K. N is the mother of G. G is the father of K. Paternal grandmother is the father's mother. N is G's mother, and G is K's father. So, N is K's paternal grandmother. Therefore, this statement is correct. Statement 3: M is the mother of K. From our decoding of 'M @ R' and 'R % K', we established that M is the mother of R and K. Therefore, this statement is correct. Statement 4: R is the daughter of G. We know R is the sister of K and M is their mother. We know K is the son of G and M is the wife of G. Since R is K's sister and M is R's mother (and G is M's husband and K's father), R is also the daughter of G. Therefore, this statement is correct. The statement that is NOT correct is Statement 1. Revision Table: Blood Relation Statements Statement Derived Relationship Correctness T is the paternal grandfather of M. T is G's father, G is M's husband. T is M's father-in-law. Incorrect N is the paternal grandmother of K. N is G's mother, G is K's father. N is K's father's mother. Correct M is the mother of K. M @ R & R % K implies M is mother of R and K. Also K # G & M & G implies M is mother of K. Correct R is the daughter of G. R is sister of K, K is son of G, M is wife of G and mother of R. R is daughter of G. Correct Additional Information: Understanding Paternal & Maternal Relations In blood relations questions, it's important to distinguish between paternal and maternal relationships: Paternal: Relating to the father's side of the family. Paternal grandfather: Father's father. Paternal grandmother: Father's mother. Paternal uncle: Father's brother. Paternal aunt: Father's sister. Maternal: Relating to the mother's side of the family. Maternal grandfather: Mother's father. Maternal grandmother: Mother's mother. Maternal uncle: Mother's brother. Maternal aunt: Mother's sister. In-law relationships are different, referring to relatives by marriage (e.g., father-in-law is spouse's father).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 21archived

Select the combination of letters that when sequentially placed in the blanks of the given series will complete the series. U A _ B _ T U _ C B D _ _ A C B _ T U A C _ _ T

  1. A
    C, D, A, T, U, D, C, D
  2. B
    C, D, A, U, U, D, B, D
  3. C
    C, D, A, T, U, D, B, D
  4. D
    D, C, A, T, U, D, D, B
Show answer
C. C, D, A, T, U, D, B, D

Letter Series Completion: Finding the Repeating Pattern The question asks us to find the correct combination of letters to fill the blanks in the given series so that it follows a specific pattern. The given series is: U A _ B _ T U _ C B D _ _ A C B _ T U A C _ _ T Let's count the total number of characters and blanks in the series. There are 16 given letters and 8 blanks, making the total length of the series 24 characters. In letter series completion questions, the most common patterns involve repetition of a block of letters, alternation of patterns, or progression based on alphabetical position or other rules. With a length of 24, possible block lengths are divisors of 24, such as 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12. We are given options for the sequence of letters that should fill the blanks. Let's test the option that is indicated as correct and see if it forms a discernible pattern. The correct option provides the following sequence to fill the 8 blanks: C, D, A, T, U, D, B, D Let's identify the positions of the blanks in the original series. Counting from the first letter (U) as position 1: U(1) A(2) _(3) B(4) _(5) T(6) U(7) _(8) C(9) B(10) D(11) _(12) _(13) A(14) C(15) B(16) _(17) T(18) U(19) A(20) C(21) _(22) _(23) T(24) The blanks are at positions 3, 5, 8, 12, 13, 17, 22, and 23. Now, let's insert the letters from the correct option (C, D, A, T, U, D, B, D) into these blank positions sequentially: Blank at position 3 gets 'C'. Blank at position 5 gets 'D'. Blank at position 8 gets 'A'. Blank at position 12 gets 'T'. Blank at position 13 gets 'U'. Blank at position 17 gets 'D'. Blank at position 22 gets 'B'. Blank at position 23 gets 'D'. The series after filling the blanks becomes: U A C B D T U A C B D T U A C B D T U A C B D T Let's write this complete series out: U A C B D T U A C B D T U A C B D T U A C B D T Observing this completed series, we can see a repeating pattern. Let's divide the series into segments of 6 characters: Segment 1: U A C B D T Segment 2: U A C B D T Segment 3: U A C B D T Segment 4: U A C B D T The entire series is formed by repeating the block UACBDT four times. The length of the block is 6, and the total length of the series is 24 ($4 \times 6 = 24$). Now let's verify if the letters provided in the correct option correctly fill the blanks according to this repeating pattern. The repeating block is UACBDT. The blanks are at positions 3, 5, 8, 12, 13, 17, 22, 23. Blank 1 at position 3: This is the 3rd character of the 1st block (UACBDT). The 3rd character is C. This matches the first letter in the filling sequence (C). Blank 2 at position 5: This is the 5th character of the 1st block (UACBDT). The 5th character is D. This matches the second letter (D). Blank 3 at position 8: This is the 8th character overall, which is the 2nd character of the 2nd block (positions 7-12). The 2nd character of UACBDT is A. This matches the third letter (A). Blank 4 at position 12: This is the 12th character overall, which is the 6th character of the 2nd block. The 6th character of UACBDT is T. This matches the fourth letter (T). Blank 5 at position 13: This is the 13th character overall, which is the 1st character of the 3rd block (positions 13-18). The 1st character of UACBDT is U. This matches the fifth letter (U). Blank 6 at position 17: This is the 17th character overall, which is the 5th character of the 3rd block. The 5th character of UACBDT is D. This matches the sixth letter (D). Blank 7 at position 22: This is the 22nd character overall, which is the 4th character of the 4th block (positions 19-24). The 4th character of UACBDT is B. This matches the seventh letter (B). Blank 8 at position 23: This is the 23rd character overall, which is the 5th character of the 4th block. The 5th character of UACBDT is D. This matches the eighth letter (D). All the letters from the sequence C, D, A, T, U, D, B, D correctly fill the blanks to form a series where the block UACBDT repeats 4 times. Therefore, this is the correct combination of letters. Here is a summary table: Blank Number Position in Series Position in Repeating Block (UACBDT) Character from Repeating Block Character from Option 3 Match? 1 3 3rd C C Yes 2 5 5th D D Yes 3 8 2nd (of 2nd block) A A Yes 4 12 6th (of 2nd block) T T Yes 5 13 1st (of 3rd block) U U Yes 6 17 5th (of 3rd block) D D Yes 7 22 4th (of 4th block) B B Yes 8 23 5th (of 4th block) D D Yes Revision Table: Key Concepts in Letter Series Concept Description Example Pattern Type Repetition A fixed block of letters repeats throughout the series. e.g., ABCABCABC... Alternation Two or more different patterns or blocks alternate. e.g., ABCXYZABCXYZ... Progression Letters change based on a rule, like moving a fixed number of steps in the alphabet. e.g., A, C, E, G... (stepping by 2) Cyclic Shift A block of letters repeats, but the starting letter shifts in each cycle. e.g., ABCD, BCDA, CDAB, DABC... Additional Information on Solving Letter Series Solving letter series problems requires keen observation and the ability to identify underlying rules or patterns. Here are some tips: Count the total number of elements: This can give clues about the possible length of repeating blocks (divisors of the total length). Look for repeating segments: Identify groups of letters that appear more than once. This is often the key to finding the repeating block. Analyze the options: The options tell you what letters are proposed for the blanks. Substituting them can help reveal the pattern, as shown in this example. Check for alphabetical or positional rules: If no direct repetition is obvious, look at the position of letters in the alphabet (A=1, B=2, etc.) or the difference in positions between consecutive letters or groups. Consider combinations: Sometimes the pattern might involve a combination of repetition and progression, or two alternating patterns. Break down the series: Try splitting the series into smaller groups based on possible block lengths and analyze each group. In this specific problem, the pattern was a simple, direct repetition of a single block once the blanks were filled correctly according to option 3.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 22archived

Select the number from among the given options that can replace the question mark (?) in the following series 10, 22, 35, 40, 72, 40, ?

  1. A
    134
  2. B
    143
  3. C
    131
  4. D
    133
Show answer
D. 133

Solving the Number Series Pattern The given series is 10, 22, 35, 40, 72, 40, ?. We need to identify the pattern in this number series to find the missing number. Let's look at the series carefully. It doesn't follow a simple arithmetic or geometric progression. When a series shows fluctuations or repeats numbers, it might be an interleaved series or follow a complex pattern. Let's try splitting the series into two alternate series: Terms at odd positions (1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th): 10, 35, 72, ? Terms at even positions (2nd, 4th, 6th): 22, 40, 40 Analyzing the Odd-Positioned Series Let's examine the series at odd positions: 10, 35, 72, ? Find the differences between consecutive terms in this sub-series: Difference between 3rd and 1st term: $35 - 10 = 25$ Difference between 5th and 3rd term: $72 - 35 = 37$ Difference between the missing 7th term and 5th term: Let the missing term be X. The difference is $X - 72$. Now, let's look at the differences of these differences (second differences): Second difference: $37 - 25 = 12$ Second difference: $(X - 72) - 37 = X - 109$ The sequence of second differences found so far is 12. If we observe the original series structure, the values seem to grow in the odd-positioned sequence. A common pattern for second differences is a constant value or a sequence like multiples of a number (e.g., 12, 24, 36...) or powers of a number (e.g., 12, 24, 48...). Given the options, let's assume the second difference follows the pattern where it doubles, i.e., 12, 24. So, the next second difference should be 24. Setting the second difference equal to 24: \(X - 109 = 24\) Now, solve for X: \(X = 109 + 24\) \(X = 133\) This value, 133, is one of the given options. This suggests that the pattern for the odd-positioned series is that the second difference increases by 12 for the first two terms, then perhaps doubles for the next step, or follows a sequence like 12, 24. Assuming 12, 24 is the pattern for second differences that leads to the correct answer from the options, let's verify the steps: First increase: 25 Second increase: 37 ($25 + 12$) Third increase: 61 ($37 + 24$) This results in the odd-positioned series: 1st term: 10 3rd term: $10 + 25 = 35$ 5th term: $35 + 37 = 72$ 7th term: $72 + 61 = 133$ This pattern successfully generates the known terms and predicts the 7th term as 133. Analyzing the Even-Positioned Series The series at even positions is 22, 40, 40. Differences between consecutive terms in this sub-series: Difference between 4th and 2nd term: $40 - 22 = 18$ Difference between 6th and 4th term: $40 - 40 = 0$ The pattern in the even-positioned series (18, 0) is not as clear-cut as the odd-positioned one. However, since the question asks for the 7th term, which falls in the odd-positioned sequence, the pattern of the even-positioned sequence is not required to find the answer. Based on the consistent pattern found in the odd-positioned series, the missing number is 133. The final series with the missing number is 10, 22, 35, 40, 72, 40, 133. Revision Table: Series Pattern Analysis Position Term Sub-Series Difference from Previous Term (Sub-Series) Second Difference (Sub-Series) 1 10 Odd - - 2 22 Even - - 3 35 Odd 35 - 10 = 25 - 4 40 Even 40 - 22 = 18 - 5 72 Odd 72 - 35 = 37 37 - 25 = 12 6 40 Even 40 - 40 = 0 0 - 18 = -18 7 133 Odd 133 - 72 = 61 61 - 37 = 24 Additional Information: Types of Number Series Patterns Number series questions test your ability to identify logical rules that govern a sequence of numbers. Common patterns include: Arithmetic Series: A constant difference between consecutive terms (e.g., 2, 5, 8, 11...). Geometric Series: A constant ratio between consecutive terms (e.g., 3, 6, 12, 24...). Difference Series: The differences between consecutive terms form an arithmetic or geometric series (e.g., 1, 2, 4, 7, 11... differences are 1, 2, 3, 4...). Double Difference Series: The differences between the differences form a pattern (as seen in this problem's odd series). Interleaved Series: Two or more independent series combined into one sequence. Square/Cube Series: Terms are related to squares or cubes of position numbers or other base numbers ($n^2$, $n^3$, $n^2 \pm c$, $n^3 \pm c$). Combination Series: Patterns involve a combination of operations (e.g., alternate addition and subtraction, multiply and add/subtract). Fibonacci or Similar Series: A term is the sum of the previous two terms (e.g., 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8...). Identifying the type of pattern is the first step in solving number series problems. Looking at differences, ratios, and alternate terms are common strategies.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 23archived

Read the given statements and conclusions carefully. Assuming that the information given in the statements is true, even if it appears to be at variance with commonly known facts, decide which of the given conclusions logically follow(s) from the statements. Statements: No bank is an office. All offices are stalls. Conclusions: I. No bank is a stall. II. No stall is a bank. III. Some stalls are offices. IV. All the stalls are offices

  1. A
    Both conclusions I and II follow
  2. B
    Only conclusion I follows
  3. C
    Both conclusions I and IV follow
  4. D
    Only conclusion III follows
Show answer
D. Only conclusion III follows

The correct answer is Only conclusion III follows. We are looking for valid s. For example, "All Offices are Stalls" (A-type) immediately implies "Some Offices are Stalls" (I-type). It also implies "Some Stalls are Offices" (I-type), assuming Offices are not empty. Understanding how these types of statements relate to each other is crucial for solving syllogism problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 24archived

Select the option in which the numbers are related in the same way as are the numbers of the following set. (6, 9, 45)

  1. A
    (7, 4, 48)
  2. B
    (2, 8, 46)
  3. C
    (8, 10, 36)
  4. D
    (6, 8, 60)
Show answer
C. (8, 10, 36)

Solving Number Analogy Questions Number analogy questions test your ability to find a specific relationship or pattern between numbers in a given set and then identify another set of numbers that follows the same rule. The key is to carefully examine the initial set to uncover the underlying logic. Analysing the Given Number Set (6, 9, 45) Let the given set be $(A, B, C)$, where $A=6$, $B=9$, and $C=45$. We need to find a relationship between these three numbers. Let's explore various possibilities: Is it simple addition or subtraction? $6+9 = 15 \neq 45$. $9-6 = 3 \neq 45$. Is it multiplication? $6 \times 9 = 54 \neq 45$. Is it related to squares or cubes? $6^2 = 36$, $9^2 = 81$. How can we get 45 from 36 and 81? $81 - 36 = 45$. This looks like a promising pattern: the difference between the squares of the first two numbers (specifically, the square of the larger minus the square of the smaller) equals the third number. Let's verify this rule. If $A=6$ and $B=9$, where $B > A$, the rule is $B^2 - A^2 = C$. Plugging in the numbers: $9^2 - 6^2 = 81 - 36 = 45$. This matches the given set $(6, 9, 45)$. So, the identified relationship is that the third number is the difference between the square of the second number and the square of the first number, assuming the second number is larger than the first. Alternatively, it's the absolute difference between the squares of the first two numbers. Let's state the rule as: If the set is $(A, B, C)$, then $B^2 - A^2 = C$, assuming $B > A$. Or more generally, $|A^2 - B^2| = C$. Given the original set (6, 9, 45) where $9 > 6$, the rule $9^2 - 6^2 = 45$ holds. Let's apply this rule to the options. Testing the Options Based on the Relationship We will now examine each option set $(A, B, C)$ and check if $B^2 - A^2 = C$ (assuming $B > A$) or $|A^2 - B^2| = C$ holds true. Option Set (A, B, C) Calculation ($B^2 - A^2$) Result Matches C? 1 (7, 4, 48) $4^2 - 7^2$ (assuming $B>A$ is not mandatory) or $|7^2 - 4^2|$ $16 - 49 = -33$ $|49 - 16| = 33$ No (Target is 48) 2 (2, 8, 46) $8^2 - 2^2$ $64 - 4 = 60$ No (Target is 46) 3 (8, 10, 36) $10^2 - 8^2$ $100 - 64 = 36$ Yes (Target is 36) 4 (6, 8, 60) $8^2 - 6^2$ $64 - 36 = 28$ No (Target is 60) Conclusion for the Number Analogy Based on the analysis, the set (8, 10, 36) follows the same relationship as the original set (6, 9, 45), where the third number is the difference between the squares of the second and first numbers ($B^2 - A^2 = C$). Revision Table: Key Concepts Concept Explanation Relevance to this Problem Number Analogy Finding a pattern/relationship in a set of numbers and applying it to other sets. The core task of the question. Identifying Patterns Looking for mathematical operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, squares, cubes, etc.) that connect the numbers in a set. Crucial first step in solving the problem. Difference of Squares The algebraic identity $a^2 - b^2 = (a+b)(a-b)$. The pattern discovered in this specific problem ($B^2 - A^2 = C$). Additional Information: Strategies for Number Set Reasoning When tackling number set reasoning or number analogy questions, consider the following strategies to find the pattern: Basic Operations: Check for addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division between the numbers. Powers and Roots: Look for squares, cubes, square roots, or cube roots of the numbers. Combinations of Operations: The pattern might involve a combination, like adding two numbers and then multiplying by a third, or squaring a number and adding another. Differences and Ratios: Analyse the differences or ratios between consecutive numbers. Digit Properties: Sometimes the pattern involves the digits of the numbers (sum of digits, product of digits, etc.). Order Matters: Pay attention to the order of the numbers in the set. The relationship might depend on which number is first, second, or third. Test Your Rule: Once you think you've found a pattern in the given set, test it rigorously on the options provided. Practicing various types of number analogy problems will help you recognise common patterns quickly.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 25archived

Four number-pairs have been given, out of which three are alike in some manner and one is different. Select the number-pair that is different.

  1. A
    21 ∶ 139
  2. B
    25 ∶ 167
  3. C
    15 ∶ 197
  4. D
    27 ∶ 181
Show answer
C. 15 ∶ 197

Analysing Number-Pair Differences This question requires us to identify the number-pair that stands out from the rest based on some shared mathematical property. We are given four number-pairs, and we need to find the one that does not fit the pattern established by the other three. Step-by-Step Pair Examination To find the pattern, let's analyze each pair (N1 ∶ N2). A common strategy is to look at the properties of the numbers themselves or the relationship between them. Let's calculate the sum of the digits for the first number (N1) in each pair. Let this sum be denoted as $S_1$. Then, we will calculate the value $N_2 + S_1$ and determine if it is an even or odd number. Pair 1: (21 ∶ 139) The first number is $N_1 = 21$. The sum of the digits of $N_1$ is $S_1 = 2 + 1 = 3$. Now, let's calculate $N_2 + S_1$: $139 + 3 = 142$. The result, 142, is an even number. Pair 2: (25 ∶ 167) The first number is $N_1 = 25$. The sum of the digits of $N_1$ is $S_1 = 2 + 5 = 7$. Calculate $N_2 + S_1$: $167 + 7 = 174$. The result, 174, is an even number. Pair 3: (15 ∶ 197) The first number is $N_1 = 15$. The sum of the digits of $N_1$ is $S_1 = 1 + 5 = 6$. Calculate $N_2 + S_1$: $197 + 6 = 203$. The result, 203, is an odd number. Pair 4: (27 ∶ 181) The first number is $N_1 = 27$. The sum of the digits of $N_1$ is $S_1 = 2 + 7 = 9$. Calculate $N_2 + S_1$: $181 + 9 = 190$. The result, 190, is an even number. Identifying the Unique Number Pair After examining all the pairs, we can see a pattern based on the parity (evenness or oddness) of the result from the calculation $N_2 + S_1$: For the pairs (21 ∶ 139), (25 ∶ 167), and (27 ∶ 181), the calculation $N_2 + S_1$ resulted in an even number (142, 174, and 190, respectively). For the pair (15 ∶ 197), the calculation $N_2 + S_1$ resulted in an odd number (203). This distinction shows that the pair (15 ∶ 197) is the one that differs from the others, as it follows a different parity rule.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 26archived

Who among the following is credited with postulating three laws of planetary motion?

  1. A
    Gailileo Galilei
  2. B
    Isaac Newton
  3. C
    Tycho Brahe
  4. D
    Johannes Kepler
Show answer
D. Johannes Kepler

Understanding the Pioneer of Planetary Motion Laws The question asks about the scientist credited with postulating the three fundamental laws of planetary motion. These laws describe how planets move around the Sun. Who Postulated the Laws of Planetary Motion? The scientist famously known for discovering the three laws of planetary motion is Johannes Kepler. Kepler was a German astronomer and mathematician who lived from 1571 to 1630. He worked as an assistant to the renowned Danish astronomer Tycho Brahe, who had collected a vast amount of precise astronomical data over many years. After Brahe's death, Kepler inherited his extensive observational data, particularly the data on the orbit of Mars. Using this detailed and accurate data, Kepler spent years performing complex calculations and analyses, which ultimately led him to formulate his three laws describing planetary orbits. Kepler's Three Laws of Planetary Motion Kepler's laws revolutionized astronomy and laid the groundwork for Isaac Newton's law of universal gravitation. The three laws are: The Law of Ellipses: This law states that the orbit of every planet in the solar system is an ellipse with the Sun at one of the two foci. Before Kepler, it was widely believed that planets moved in perfect circles. This law showed that the orbits are slightly elongated circles, or ellipses. The Law of Equal Areas: This law states that a line segment joining a planet and the Sun sweeps out equal areas during equal intervals of time. This means that planets move faster when they are closer to the Sun and slower when they are farther away. The Law of Harmonies (or Law of Periods): This law states that the square of the orbital period (\(T\)) of a planet is directly proportional to the cube of the semi-major axis (\(r\)) of its orbit. Mathematically, this is expressed as \(T^2 \propto r^3\) or \(T^2/r^3 = \text{constant}\) for all planets orbiting the same star. This law shows a mathematical relationship between a planet's distance from the Sun and the time it takes to complete one orbit. Why Other Options Are Not Correct Galileo Galilei: Galileo was a contemporary of Kepler. He is famous for using the telescope to make groundbreaking observations, such as the phases of Venus, the moons of Jupiter, and sunspots, which supported the heliocentric model. While a pivotal figure in the scientific revolution, he did not formulate the laws of planetary motion. Isaac Newton: Newton, born after Kepler's death, built upon Kepler's work. Newton's law of universal gravitation explained *why* the planets follow Kepler's laws. He showed that Kepler's laws could be derived from his law of gravity and his laws of motion. Tycho Brahe: Tycho Brahe was a brilliant observational astronomer who amassed the most accurate astronomical data of his time without using a telescope. Kepler used Brahe's data to develop his laws. While Brahe collected the data, he did not formulate the laws of planetary motion himself; he proposed a hybrid model of the solar system. Scientist Key Contribution (Related to Astronomy/Physics) Johannes Kepler Formulated the three laws of planetary motion. Galileo Galilei Pioneering telescopic observations, supported heliocentrism. Isaac Newton Formulated laws of motion and universal gravitation, explained Kepler's laws. Tycho Brahe Collected extensive, accurate astronomical observational data. Therefore, based on historical records and scientific contributions, Johannes Kepler is the scientist credited with postulating the three laws of planetary motion. Revision Table: Key Astronomers and Contributions Scientist Time Period Major Contributions Nicolaus Copernicus 1473-1543 Proposed the heliocentric model of the solar system. Tycho Brahe 1546-1601 Made precise astronomical observations (pre-telescope). Johannes Kepler 1571-1630 Formulated the three laws of planetary motion. Galileo Galilei 1564-1642 First to use telescope for systematic astronomical observation; supported heliocentrism. Isaac Newton 1643-1727 Developed laws of motion and universal gravitation; unified terrestrial and celestial mechanics. Additional Information on Planetary Orbits and Laws Kepler's laws were empirical, meaning they were derived from observation and data rather than from a fundamental physical theory. It was Newton who later provided the theoretical basis for these laws through his law of universal gravitation, showing that the elliptical orbits and the relationships described by Kepler's laws are a natural consequence of an inverse square law of gravitational attraction. Understanding Kepler's laws is crucial for studying celestial mechanics and the orbits of planets, moons, asteroids, and comets. They are fundamental to calculating trajectories for space missions and understanding the dynamics of solar systems beyond our own.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 27archived

Who among the following was the first Indian to unfurl the tricolour on foreign land?

  1. A
    Begum Hazrat Maha
  2. B
    Bhikaji Cama
  3. C
    Annie Besant
  4. D
    Lakshmi Sehgal
Show answer
B. Bhikaji Cama

Understanding the First Indian to Unfurl Tricolour Abroad The question asks about the historical figure who first unfurled the Indian national flag on foreign soil. This was a significant moment in India's freedom struggle, symbolizing the aspirations for independence on an international platform. Let's analyze the options provided: Begum Hazrat Mahal: She was a prominent figure during the Indian Rebellion of 1857 and ruled Awadh. While a key freedom fighter, she is not known for unfurling the flag abroad. Bhikaji Cama: Often referred to as the 'Mother of the Indian Revolution', she was a fervent advocate for Indian independence. She lived in exile and actively participated in nationalist movements in Europe. Annie Besant: A British socialist, theosophist, women's rights activist, writer, orator, educationist, and philanthropist, she became a prominent supporter of both Irish and Indian self-rule. She was a major figure in the Indian independence movement but is not credited with the first flag unfurling abroad. Lakshmi Sehgal: A revolutionary of the Indian independence movement, an officer of the Indian National Army, and the Minister of Women's Affairs in the Azad Hind government. Her significant contributions came later in the freedom struggle. Bhikaji Cama's Historic Achievement Bhikaji Cama holds the distinction of being the first Indian to unfurl what became a precursor to the Indian national flag on foreign land. This momentous event took place on 22nd August 1907 at the International Socialist Conference in Stuttgart, Germany. The flag unfurled by Bhikaji Cama was not exactly the tricolour we know today, but a version designed by her and other freedom fighters, including Veer Savarkar. It featured: Three stripes: Green, saffron, and red (top to bottom). Eight lotuses representing the eight provinces of British India. A crescent moon and a sun, symbolizing Hindu-Muslim unity. The words 'Vande Mataram' written in the Devanagari script in the central saffron band. By unfurling this flag and speaking passionately about India's condition under British rule at an international forum, she brought the Indian struggle for independence to global attention. Significance of the Stuttgart Flag Unfurling This act by Bhikaji Cama was a powerful statement against British imperialism. It was perhaps the first time the demand for complete self-government for India was articulated publicly on a global stage using a symbol representing India. Conclusion on the First Unfurling Abroad Based on historical records, Bhikaji Cama was the individual who first raised a flag representing India's struggle for independence on foreign soil at the Stuttgart Conference in 1907. Personality Key Contribution(s) Link to Flag Unfurling Abroad Begum Hazrat Mahal Leader in 1857 Revolt No direct link to unfurling flag abroad Bhikaji Cama Unfurled flag at Stuttgart (1907), Nationalist activity in Europe First Indian to unfurl flag abroad Annie Besant Home Rule Movement, Theosophy No direct link to unfurling flag abroad Lakshmi Sehgal Indian National Army, Azad Hind Government No direct link to unfurling flag abroad Revision Table: Key Freedom Fighter Contributions Figure Notable Role/Event Begum Hazrat Mahal Resistance in Awadh during 1857 Bhikaji Cama International advocate for independence, Stuttgart flag unfurling 1907 Annie Besant Home Rule Movement in India Lakshmi Sehgal Commander in INA, Minister in Azad Hind Govt Additional Information on Indian National Flag History The design of the Indian national flag evolved over time. Several flags were proposed and used before the current tricolour was adopted: Sister Nivedita's Flag (1904-06): The first political flag for India, red and yellow with 'Vande Mataram'. Calcutta Flag (1906): A tricolour (orange, yellow, green) with eight lotuses and a sun & crescent moon. Bhikaji Cama's Flag (1907): Unfurled in Stuttgart, similar to the Calcutta flag but slightly different in design and colour order. Home Rule Movement Flag (1917): Used by Annie Besant and Tilak, included the Union Jack, stars, and five red and four green horizontal stripes. Gandhi's Flag (1921): Designed with charkha (spinning wheel) and three colours (red, green, white). Pingali Venkayya's Swaraj Flag (1931): Adopted by INC, red (sacrifices), green (hope), white (truth) with charkha. Current National Flag (adopted 1947): Based on the Swaraj flag, with saffron, white, and green stripes and the Ashoka Chakra replacing the charkha. Bhikaji Cama's unfurling of her version of the tricolour in 1907 remains a landmark event as the first instance of an Indian nationalist raising such a symbol abroad to represent the demand for independence.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 28archived

Which of the following states’ former Governor, Mata Prasad, died in January 2021?

  1. A
    Arunachal Pradesh
  2. B
    Goa
  3. C
    Uttar Pradesh
  4. D
    Uttarakhand
Show answer
A. Arunachal Pradesh

The question asks about the state where Mata Prasad served as former Governor, who passed away in January 2021. To answer this, we need to identify the state associated with his governorship. Analyzing Former Governor Mata Prasad Mata Prasad was a notable figure in Indian politics who held the constitutional office of Governor for an Indian state. The question specifically mentions his passing in January 2021. Identifying the State of Governorship Based on historical records and news reports regarding the death of Mata Prasad in January 2021, he served as the former Governor of Arunachal Pradesh. Mata Prasad was the Governor of Arunachal Pradesh from October 21, 1993, to October 20, 1999. He passed away on January 19, 2021, at the age of 95. His death was widely reported in various news outlets, confirming his role as a former Governor of Arunachal Pradesh. Let's look at the provided options: Arunachal Pradesh Goa Uttar Pradesh Uttarakhand Comparing the information about Mata Prasad with the options, it is clear that Arunachal Pradesh is the correct state. Statement Analysis The core of the question is identifying the state linked to former Governor Mata Prasad's service at the time of his death in January 2021. The options provide potential states. Knowing Mata Prasad's political career confirms his Governorship in Arunachal Pradesh. Conclusion on Former Governor Mata Prasad's State Therefore, the former Governor Mata Prasad, who died in January 2021, served the state of Arunachal Pradesh. Figure Details Name Mata Prasad Role Former Governor State Served Arunachal Pradesh Year of Death January 2021 Revision Table: Mata Prasad and Arunachal Pradesh Key Aspect Information Person Mata Prasad Position Held Governor Associated State Arunachal Pradesh Period of Governorship 1993-1999 Event Mentioned Death Date of Event January 2021 Additional Information: Governors of Indian States The Governor is the constitutional head of each of the twenty-eight states in India. The Governor is appointed by the President of India for a term of five years and holds office at the pleasure of the President. The Governor acts on the advice of the Council of Ministers of the state. They have executive, legislative, financial, and judicial powers. The primary role of the Governor is to preserve, protect, and defend the Constitution and the law as incorporated in their oath of office. They also act as a bridge between the central government and the state government. Understanding the role of a Governor is important for comprehending the federal structure of India.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 29archived

_________ is created by the collision of convergent plate boundaries.

  1. A
    Mid-ocean ridge
  2. B
    Mountain building
  3. C
    Land erosion
  4. D
    Oceanic trench
Show answer
B. Mountain building

Understanding Convergent Plate Boundaries The Earth's crust is made up of large sections called tectonic plates. These plates are constantly moving, albeit very slowly. The places where these plates meet are called plate boundaries. There are different types of plate boundaries based on how the plates are moving relative to each other. The question asks what is created by the collision of convergent plate boundaries. Convergent plate boundaries are locations where two tectonic plates move towards each other. When these plates collide, the outcome depends on the type of crust involved (oceanic or continental). Collision Outcomes at Convergent Boundaries Let's explore what happens when different types of crust collide at a convergent plate boundary: Oceanic-Continental Collision: The denser oceanic plate usually bends downwards and sinks beneath the lighter continental plate. This process is called subduction. Subduction can lead to the formation of volcanic mountain ranges along the continental margin and deep ocean trenches. Oceanic-Oceanic Collision: One oceanic plate subducts beneath the other. This can form volcanic island arcs and deep ocean trenches. Continental-Continental Collision: When two continental plates collide, neither is dense enough to subduct significantly into the mantle. Instead, the crust is uplifted, folded, and faulted, resulting in the formation of large mountain ranges. This intense geological activity is often referred to as mountain building or orogeny. The question specifically mentions the "collision" of convergent plate boundaries. While other features like trenches can form at convergent boundaries through subduction, the most direct and prominent result of a head-on collision, especially between continental plates, is significant uplift and thickening of the crust, leading to mountain building. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the given options in the context of convergent plate boundaries and their collision: Mid-ocean ridge: These are underwater mountain ranges formed at divergent plate boundaries, where plates move away from each other and new crust is created by volcanic activity. This is not a result of convergent plate boundary collision. Mountain building: As discussed, the collision of convergent plate boundaries, particularly continental-continental collisions, is the primary process responsible for creating large mountain ranges through crustal uplift, folding, and faulting. This aligns perfectly with the consequences of a convergent collision. Land erosion: Erosion is the process of wearing away rock and soil by natural agents like wind and water. While erosion shapes existing landforms, it is a destructive process that occurs after landforms like mountains are created. It is not something created by the initial collision of plate boundaries. Oceanic trench: Oceanic trenches are deep depressions in the ocean floor formed at convergent plate boundaries where one plate subducts beneath another. While trenches are formed at convergent boundaries, the term "collision" might more strongly imply the crushing and uplift associated with mountain building, especially in simplified contexts. Also, trenches specifically relate to subduction, which is a type of convergent boundary interaction, but mountain building is a distinct and major outcome of convergent collision, particularly continental-continental. Based on the mechanisms of plate tectonics, mountain building is the most direct and significant result associated with the collision aspect of convergent plate boundaries, especially in the context of continental collision. Conclusion on Convergent Boundary Collision When convergent plate boundaries collide, the immense forces involved deform the Earth's crust. In the case of continental-continental collision, this leads to the uplift and folding of rocks over vast areas, creating massive mountain ranges. This geological process is known as mountain building. Plate Boundary Interactions and Formations Boundary Type Plate Movement Features Created Relevance to Question Divergent Move Apart Mid-ocean ridges, rift valleys, volcanoes Incorrect (plates move apart) Convergent Move Together (Collide) Mountain ranges, volcanic arcs, trenches Directly relevant (collision leads to mountain building) Transform Slide Past Fault lines, earthquakes Incorrect (plates slide past) Revision Table: Plate Boundaries & Landforms This table summarizes key information about plate boundaries: Plate Boundary Type Description Major Geological Features Convergent Boundary Plates move towards each other. Mountain ranges, volcanoes, oceanic trenches, island arcs. Divergent Boundary Plates move away from each other. Mid-ocean ridges, rift valleys. Transform Boundary Plates slide past each other horizontally. Fault lines (e.g., San Andreas Fault), earthquakes. Additional Information: Orogeny and Plate Tectonics The process of mountain building is also known as orogeny. Orogeny involves intense folding, faulting, and uplift of the Earth's crust. This is a direct consequence of the immense compressional forces generated when convergent plate boundaries, especially those carrying continental crust, collide. Plate tectonics theory provides the framework for understanding these large-scale geological processes. It explains how the movement of the lithospheric plates shapes the Earth's surface over millions of years, leading to the formation of continents, ocean basins, volcanoes, earthquakes, and spectacular mountain ranges.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 30archived

According to the Puranas, Lord Vishnu took the shape of ______ in order to rescue the earth, which had sunk into water.

  1. A
    a boar
  2. B
    a lion
  3. C
    a tiger
  4. D
    an elephant
Show answer
A. a boar

According to the Puranas, when the demon Hiranyaksha dragged the Earth (personified as Bhudevi) to the bottom of the cosmic ocean, Lord Vishnu assumed the form of a mighty boar — the Varaha avatar. Varaha killed Hiranyaksha and lifted the Earth back on his tusks, restoring it to its rightful place. Varaha is the third of the ten Dashavatara. The lion form is Narasimha (killed Hiranyakashipu, not concerned with rescuing the Earth); Vishnu has no tiger or elephant avatar in the standard Puranic list. Hence the correct answer is a boar.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 31archived

Which of the following is a water-soluble vitamin?

  1. A
    Vitamin K
  2. B
    Vitamin C
  3. C
    Vitamin A
  4. D
    Vitamin D
Show answer
B. Vitamin C

Understanding Vitamins: Water-Soluble vs. Fat-Soluble Vitamins are essential nutrients that our bodies need in small amounts to function properly. They are broadly classified into two main categories based on how they dissolve and are absorbed by the body: water-soluble vitamins and fat-soluble vitamins. What are Water-Soluble Vitamins? Water-soluble vitamins dissolve in water. Because they dissolve in water, they are not stored in large amounts in the body. Any excess amount is usually excreted in urine. This means we need a regular intake of water-soluble vitamins. Examples of water-soluble vitamins include: Vitamin C (Ascorbic acid) The B vitamins (B1, B2, B3, B5, B6, B7, B9, B12) What are Fat-Soluble Vitamins? Fat-soluble vitamins dissolve in fat. They are absorbed best when consumed with dietary fat. Unlike water-soluble vitamins, fat-soluble vitamins can be stored in the body's fatty tissues and liver. Because they can be stored, they don't need to be consumed as frequently, but consuming excessively high amounts can be harmful. Examples of fat-soluble vitamins include: Vitamin A Vitamin D Vitamin E Vitamin K Analyzing the Given Vitamin Options The question asks to identify a water-soluble vitamin from the given options: Vitamin K Vitamin C Vitamin A Vitamin D Let's classify each option based on whether it is water-soluble or fat-soluble: Vitamin Category Vitamin K Fat-soluble Vitamin C Water-soluble Vitamin A Fat-soluble Vitamin D Fat-soluble Based on this classification, Vitamin C is the only water-soluble vitamin among the options provided. Vitamin K, Vitamin A, and Vitamin D are all fat-soluble vitamins. Identifying the Water-Soluble Vitamin Answer Reviewing the options and our understanding of vitamin types, the vitamin that dissolves in water and is not stored in large amounts in the body is Vitamin C. Revision Table: Key Vitamin Types Vitamin Type Solubility Storage in Body Examples Water-Soluble Dissolves in water Not stored in large amounts; excess excreted Vitamin C, B Vitamins Fat-Soluble Dissolves in fat/oil Stored in fatty tissues and liver Vitamin A, D, E, K Additional Information on Vitamin Functions Both water-soluble and fat-soluble vitamins play crucial roles in maintaining health, although their specific functions differ. Vitamin C: Important for immune function, collagen synthesis, and as an antioxidant. B Vitamins: Involved in metabolism, energy production, and nerve function. Vitamin A: Essential for vision, immune function, and cell growth. Vitamin D: Crucial for calcium absorption and bone health. Vitamin E: Acts as an antioxidant. Vitamin K: Necessary for blood clotting and bone health. Understanding the distinction between these vitamin types helps in understanding how they are absorbed, stored, and how often they need to be consumed as part of a balanced diet.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 32archived

Who among the following was the Nizam of Hyderabad in 1947?

  1. A
    Mir Mahbub Ali Khan
  2. B
    Akbar Ali Khan
  3. C
    Osman Ali
  4. D
    Nasir Jung
Show answer
C. Osman Ali

Nizam of Hyderabad in 1947: Identifying the Ruler The question asks about the identity of the Nizam of Hyderabad during the year 1947. Understanding the rulers of the princely state of Hyderabad at the time of India's independence is key to answering this. In 1947, the princely state of Hyderabad was a significant entity in the Indian subcontinent. Its ruler held the title of Nizam. Let's consider the options provided: Mir Mahbub Ali Khan: He was the 6th Nizam of Hyderabad. His reign ended in 1911. Therefore, he was not the Nizam in 1947. Akbar Ali Khan: While possibly a prominent figure, he was not the Nizam of Hyderabad. The Nizams belonged to the Asaf Jahi dynasty. Osman Ali: This refers to Mir Osman Ali Khan, Asaf Jah VII. He was the seventh and last Nizam of the princely state of Hyderabad. His reign began in 1911 and continued until Hyderabad was integrated into India in 1948. This period includes the year 1947. Nasir Jung: He was the second Nizam of Hyderabad, reigning briefly in the mid-18th century (around 1748-1750). He was not the Nizam in 1947. Based on the historical timeline and the reign of the Nizams, the ruler of Hyderabad in 1947 was Osman Ali, also known as Mir Osman Ali Khan. Identifying the Nizam of Hyderabad in 1947 The State of Hyderabad was one of the largest princely states in British India. Its ruler held immense power and wealth. In the crucial year of 1947, as British rule ended and India gained independence, the future of princely states like Hyderabad was a major political issue. The ruler at this critical juncture was Mir Osman Ali Khan. He had ascended the throne much earlier and was the reigning Nizam when India and Pakistan were formed. Revision Table: Nizams of Hyderabad Nizam Name Reign Period 1st Kamruddin Khan, Asaf Jah I 1724–1748 2nd Nasir Jung 1748–1750 ... ... ... 6th Mir Mahbub Ali Khan, Asaf Jah VI 1869–1911 7th Mir Osman Ali Khan, Asaf Jah VII 1911–1948 (Princely State period) As the table shows, Mir Osman Ali Khan (Osman Ali) was the Nizam from 1911 onwards, covering the year 1947. Additional Information on Hyderabad in 1947 In 1947, Hyderabad was a wealthy and populous state. The Nizam, Mir Osman Ali Khan, initially wished to remain independent or join Pakistan, despite the state having a majority Hindu population within its borders surrounded by India. This led to a period of tension and negotiations with the newly independent Dominion of India. The stand-off continued through 1947 and into 1948. Ultimately, the Indian government launched 'Operation Polo' in September 1948, leading to the military integration of Hyderabad into the Indian Union. Mir Osman Ali Khan eventually acceded to India and was appointed the Rajpramukh (governor) of Hyderabad State within India until the state was reorganized in 1956. Therefore, in 1947, Mir Osman Ali Khan was indeed the ruling Nizam of Hyderabad.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 33archived

Which of the following diseases is caused by a parasite?

  1. A
    Malaria
  2. B
    Goitre
  3. C
    Pneumonia
  4. D
    Plague
Show answer
A. Malaria

Malaria Identifying the Parasitic Disease To summarise the causes of the diseases listed: Disease Cause Malaria Parasite ( Plasmodium ) Goitre Iodine Deficiency Pneumonia Bacteria, Viruses, Fungi Plague Bacteria ( Yersinia pestis ) Therefore, the disease caused by a parasite is Malaria.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 34archived

With which of the following sports is the term ‘Chinaman’ associated?

  1. A
    Polo
  2. B
    Table Tennis
  3. C
    Cricket
  4. D
    Swimming
Show answer
C. Cricket

Understanding the Term 'Chinaman' in Sports The question asks to identify the sport associated with the term ‘Chinaman’. This term is a specific piece of terminology used within one of the sports listed in the options. Analyzing the Term 'Chinaman' in Cricket In the sport of cricket, the term 'Chinaman' refers to a specific type of bowling. Specifically, it describes a left-arm unorthodox spin bowler. This type of bowler delivers wrist spin with their left arm. The bowling action for a Chinaman involves the ball spinning from the off side to the leg side for a right-handed batsman, similar to a leg break delivered by a right-arm bowler, but bowled from the left arm. The term originated from a Test match in 1933 between England and the West Indies, where Ellis Achong, a left-arm spinner of Chinese origin playing for West Indies, bowled a delivery that went the other way (spun into the batsman) which England batsman Walter Robins failed to hit and was stumped. Robins reportedly said to the umpire, "Fancy being done by a bloody Chinaman!" The term, while considered by some to be outdated or potentially offensive due to its origin, remains in use in cricket terminology to describe this particular style of bowling. Evaluating Other Sports Options Let's consider the other sports listed: Polo: Polo is a team sport played on horseback where players use mallets to hit a ball. The term 'Chinaman' has no association with polo rules, techniques, or terminology. Table Tennis: Table Tennis, also known as ping-pong, is a racket sport played on a table. While various spins are used, the term 'Chinaman' is not part of table tennis vocabulary. Swimming: Swimming is an individual or team sport involving propelling oneself through water. Sports like swimming have terms related to strokes, techniques, and events, but 'Chinaman' is not one of them. Conclusion Based on the analysis, the term ‘Chinaman’ is exclusively associated with the sport of cricket, referring to a left-arm unorthodox spin delivery. Revision Table: Sports Terms Term Sport Brief Description Chinaman Cricket Left-arm unorthodox spin bowling Checkhook Polo A defensive stroke Topspin Table Tennis Forward rotation on the ball Freestyle Swimming A category of swimming races Additional Information on Cricket Bowling In cricket, bowlers use different techniques to deliver the ball and make it difficult for the batsman to hit. Bowling can be broadly categorized: Pace Bowling: Fast bowlers rely on speed and movement (swing or seam) to trouble the batsman. Spin Bowling: Spin bowlers try to impart spin on the ball to make it change direction after pitching. Spin bowling includes: Off-spin: Bowled by a right-arm bowler, spinning from off to leg side for a right-handed batsman. Leg-spin: Bowled by a right-arm bowler, spinning from leg to off side for a right-handed batsman (leg break), or spinning from off to leg side (googly). Left-arm orthodox spin: Bowled by a left-arm bowler, spinning from off to leg side for a right-handed batsman. Left-arm unorthodox spin (Chinaman): Bowled by a left-arm bowler, spinning from leg to off side for a right-handed batsman. Understanding these terms is key to following cricket matches and appreciating the nuances of the game.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 35archived

Which of the following Articles of the Constitution of India provides for the creation of a GST Council?

  1. A
    Article 246A
  2. B
    Article 279A
  3. C
    Article 269A
  4. D
    Article 323A
Show answer
B. Article 279A

Understanding the GST Council and the Indian Constitution The Goods and Services Tax (GST) is a major indirect tax reform in India. To facilitate the implementation and administration of GST, the Constitution of India provides for the creation of a dedicated body known as the GST Council. This council plays a crucial role in making recommendations on various aspects of GST. Constitutional Provision for GST Council The power to create the GST Council is derived from a specific Article inserted into the Constitution of India through the Constitution (One Hundred and First Amendment) Act, 2016. This amendment paved the way for the implementation of GST in India. Let's examine the relevant Articles mentioned in the options: Article 246A: This Article grants concurrent power to both the Parliament and the State Legislatures to make laws with respect to GST imposed by the Union or by such State. It deals with the power to legislate on GST, not the creation of the GST Council. Article 279A: This Article specifically provides for the constitution of a GST Council by the President. It lays down the framework for the establishment, composition, and functions of the GST Council. Article 269A: This Article deals with the levy and collection of Goods and Services Tax in the course of inter-State trade or commerce (Integrated GST or IGST). It specifies that IGST shall be apportioned between the Union and the States as per the recommendations of the GST Council. While related to GST, it is not about the creation of the Council itself. Article 323A: This Article deals with Administrative Tribunals. It is completely unrelated to the Goods and Services Tax or the GST Council. Based on the constitutional provisions, Article 279A is the specific Article that mandates the creation of the GST Council. Article Subject Matter Article 246A Power to legislate on GST Article 279A Constitution of GST Council Article 269A Levy and collection of IGST Article 323A Administrative Tribunals Therefore, the Article of the Constitution of India that provides for the creation of a GST Council is Article 279A. Revision Table: Key GST Articles Article Significance for GST Article 246A Legislative competence for GST Article 269A Inter-State trade/commerce GST (IGST) Article 279A Constitution of GST Council Additional Information on GST Council The GST Council is a constitutional body under Article 279A. It is a joint forum of the Centre and the States. The members include: The Union Finance Minister (Chairperson) The Union Minister of State in charge of Revenue or Finance The Minister in charge of Finance or Taxation or any other Minister nominated by each State Government The Council makes recommendations to the Union and the States on important issues related to GST, such as: The taxes, cesses, and surcharges to be subsumed under GST. The goods and services that may be subjected to or exempted from GST. Model GST Laws, principles of levy, apportionment of IGST and principles that govern the place of supply. Threshold limit of turnover for exemption from GST. Rates, including floor rates with bands of GST. Any special provision with respect to the States of Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Jammu and Kashmir, Manipur, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Nagaland, Sikkim, Tripura, Himachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand. Any other matter relating to GST, as the Council may decide.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 36archived

Which of the following is the meaning of ‘Pishtaq’ in the context of medieval Indo-Islamic architecture?

  1. A
    True arch
  2. B
    Dome
  3. C
    Water tank
  4. D
    Tall gateway
Show answer
D. Tall gateway

Understanding Pishtaq in Indo-Islamic Architecture The question asks about the meaning of the term ‘Pishtaq’ within the context of medieval Indo-Islamic architecture. This term refers to a specific architectural feature commonly found in buildings from this period. What is a Pishtaq? A Pishtaq is a Persian term used to describe a specific type of monumental entrance or gateway. It is a tall, imposing arched portal or façade, often recessed, which marks the entrance to a mosque, madrasa, palace, or tomb. Pishtaqs became a prominent feature in Islamic architecture, particularly during the Timurid and Mughal periods in India. Key characteristics of a Pishtaq include: It is a large, rectangular frame that surrounds an arched opening. It is often elaborately decorated with calligraphy, geometric patterns, and floral motifs. It serves as a grand facade or gateway leading into the main building or courtyard. It is typically much taller than the structure it is attached to, creating a sense of grandeur and scale. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the given options in the context of medieval Indo-Islamic architecture: True arch: A true arch is a structural element used to span a space, created by wedge-shaped blocks (voussoirs) that transfer weight outwards. While Pishtaqs incorporate arches, the term ‘Pishtaq’ refers to the entire monumental gateway structure, not just the arch itself. Dome: A dome is a rounded vaulted roof structure, often crowning a central hall or tomb. It is a distinct architectural element used for covering space, completely different from an entrance or gateway. Water tank: A water tank is a reservoir built to store water, essential for ablutions in mosques or for general use. This is a functional structure unrelated to architectural decorative or entry features like a Pishtaq. Tall gateway: This description perfectly matches the definition and appearance of a Pishtaq in Indo-Islamic architecture. It is a monumental, often towering, entrance portal. Based on the characteristics and function of a Pishtaq, the most accurate meaning among the given options is 'Tall gateway'. Pishtaqs serve as grand entrances, emphasizing the importance and scale of the building they lead into. Understanding architectural terms like Pishtaq is crucial when studying medieval Indo-Islamic buildings and their unique blend of styles. Term Meaning in Architecture Pishtaq A tall, monumental arched gateway or entrance portal. True Arch A structural element for spanning space using voussoirs. Dome A rounded roof structure. Water Tank A reservoir for storing water. Revision Table: Pishtaq and Related Concepts Concept Brief Description Relevance to Indo-Islamic Architecture Pishtaq Tall, arched gateway facade. Prominent entry feature in mosques, tombs, palaces (e.g., Taj Mahal gateway). Iwan Large vaulted hall or space, walled on three sides, with one end open. Often framed by a Pishtaq. Common element in mosques and madrasas. Dome Rounded roof. Used for crowning main structures, especially tombs and prayer halls. Minaret Tall slender tower, typically part of a mosque. Used for the call to prayer (adhan). Chatri Small, dome-like pavilion with pillars. Decorative element often found on roofs or corners. Additional Information on Pishtaq and Gateways The Pishtaq is not merely a functional entrance but also a significant decorative and symbolic element. Its height and elaborate decoration were intended to impress visitors and signify the power and piety of the patron who commissioned the building. In many famous Indo-Islamic structures, the Pishtaq forms the main entrance to the complex, often standing as a separate structure or being the most prominent part of the main building's facade. Examples of structures featuring notable Pishtaqs include: The gateway to the Taj Mahal (though the term 'Darwaza' is also used for gates). The entrance to Humayun's Tomb. Numerous mosques and madrasas from the Sultanate and Mughal periods across India and Central Asia. The architectural style evolved, with Pishtaqs varying in size, proportion, and decorative detail across different regions and time periods within the Indo-Islamic architectural tradition. They are a key feature that helps distinguish the style from others.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 37archived

What is the objective of the 'Doughnut Model' of development?

  1. A
    It envisions a world in which people and planet can thrive in balance.
  2. B
    It envisions total abandonment of technology to live at peace with environment
  3. C
    It envisions the food processing industry as the centre of development.
  4. D
    It envisions rapid development at environmental cost, then make up for it later
Show answer
A. It envisions a world in which people and planet can thrive in balance.

Understanding the Doughnut Model Objective The 'Doughnut Model', developed by economist Kate Raworth, is a visual framework for sustainable development. It proposes a safe space for humanity that lies between a social foundation (the inner boundary) and an ecological ceiling (the outer boundary). The inner boundary represents the minimum social needs required for human well-being, such as food, water, health, education, housing, income, and peace. Falling below this boundary means people are experiencing deprivation. The outer boundary represents the ecological limits or planetary boundaries that must not be crossed to prevent irreversible environmental damage, such as climate change, ocean acidification, biodiversity loss, and resource depletion. Overshooting this boundary harms the planet and ultimately undermines human well-being. The 'doughnut' shape itself is the space between these two boundaries. The objective of the Doughnut Model is to ensure that all people have their basic needs met (staying above the social foundation) without overshooting the Earth's ecological limits (staying within the ecological ceiling). This balance allows both people and the planet to thrive together. Analyzing the Options based on the Doughnut Model Option 1: It envisions a world in which people and planet can thrive in balance. This statement directly aligns with the core objective of the Doughnut Model. The model aims for human prosperity within ecological limits, creating a balance where both society and the environment are healthy and sustainable. Option 2: It envisions total abandonment of technology to live at peace with environment. The Doughnut Model does not advocate for abandoning technology. Instead, it suggests using technology and innovation in ways that are sustainable and help stay within the ecological ceiling and meet social needs. Option 3: It envisions the food processing industry as the centre of development. This is incorrect. The Doughnut Model is a holistic framework for economic and social development, not focused on a single industry like food processing. Option 4: It envisions rapid development at environmental cost, then make up for it later. This describes a traditional, often unsustainable, development model. The Doughnut Model explicitly warns against development that crosses ecological boundaries, emphasizing prevention rather than trying to fix environmental damage later. It prioritizes development that respects planetary limits from the outset. Therefore, the objective of the 'Doughnut Model' of development is to create a world where humanity flourishes within the safe operating space defined by social well-being and ecological limits. Key Elements of the Doughnut Model Social Foundation: The minimum resources and services needed for a dignified life (e.g., food, water, health, education). Ecological Ceiling: The planetary boundaries that must not be crossed to protect Earth's life-support systems (e.g., climate stability, healthy oceans). Safe and Just Space: The area between the foundation and the ceiling where humanity can thrive sustainably. Doughnut Model Boundaries Boundary Description Goal Social Foundation (Inner) Meeting basic human needs Ensure no one falls below this Ecological Ceiling (Outer) Respecting planetary limits Ensure we do not overshoot this The Doughnut (Between) Safe and Just Space Thriving for people and planet Revision Table: Doughnut Model Core Concepts Concept Explanation Objective Balanced thriving for people and planet Shape Represents safe and just space Inner Ring Social necessities (foundation) Outer Ring Ecological limits (ceiling) Additional Information on Sustainable Development Frameworks The Doughnut Model is one of several frameworks aiming for sustainable development. Other important concepts include: Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs): A set of 17 global goals set by the United Nations covering social, economic, and environmental aspects, aiming to achieve a better and more sustainable future for all. Planetary Boundaries: A scientific framework identifying nine critical Earth system processes that regulate the stability and resilience of the planet, similar to the ecological ceiling in the Doughnut Model. Green Economy: An economy that aims to reduce environmental risks and ecological scarcities, and that aims for sustainable development without degrading the environment. These frameworks all share the common goal of ensuring human well-being while respecting environmental limits, though they approach the challenge from different perspectives.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 38archived

Which of the following is NOT a feature of food security?

  1. A
    Affordability
  2. B
    Acceptability
  3. C
    Availability
  4. D
    Accessibility
Show answer
B. Acceptability

Understanding Food Security Features Food security is a critical concept related to ensuring that all people, at all times, have physical and economic access to sufficient, safe, and nutritious food that meets their dietary needs and food preferences for an active and healthy life. Several key features or pillars define food security. The most widely recognized pillars of food security include: Availability: This refers to the physical presence of food. It means having enough food produced or imported to meet the needs of the population. Factors like production, distribution, and exchange play a role in food availability. Accessibility: This means that individuals have the means to obtain food. This includes both physical access (e.g., distance to markets) and economic access (e.g., affordability, purchasing power). Food must be within reach and affordable for everyone. Utilisation: This pillar focuses on how the body makes use of food. It includes aspects like preparation of food, dietary diversity, proper storage, and health status, which enables the body to absorb nutrients effectively. Stability: This refers to the ability to access food consistently over time. It means avoiding fluctuations in food availability or access due to crises like economic downturns, climate shocks, or political instability. Food must be available, accessible, and properly utilized consistently. Analyzing the Options for Food Security Let's examine each option provided in the question in the context of these pillars: Affordability: This is a crucial component of the Accessibility pillar. If food is not affordable, people cannot economically access it, even if it is physically available. Therefore, affordability is a key feature of food security. Acceptability: This refers to food being culturally appropriate and safe to eat. While important and often linked to the Utilisation pillar (as people need to consume food safely and willingly), acceptability is generally not considered one of the primary, standalone pillars or core features in the same way that Availability, Accessibility, and Stability are. It is more of a dimension or aspect within broader categories like Utilisation or access to culturally appropriate food. Availability: As discussed, this is one of the foundational pillars of food security, referring to the physical presence of food supplies. It is definitely a key feature. Accessibility: This is another fundamental pillar, encompassing both physical and economic access (including affordability) to food. It is essential for food security. Identifying What is NOT a Food Security Feature Based on the commonly accepted framework of food security pillars (Availability, Accessibility, Utilisation, Stability), Availability and Accessibility are clearly core features. Affordability is a component of Accessibility. Acceptability, while relevant to whether people consume food, is typically not listed as a primary feature or pillar itself, unlike the others. Therefore, Acceptability is the option that is NOT considered a standalone core feature of food security in the same category as Availability or Accessibility. Food Security Pillar/Feature Description Is it a core feature? Availability Physical presence of food Yes Accessibility (includes Affordability) Ability to obtain food (physical & economic) Yes Utilisation Body's ability to use food nutrients Yes Stability Consistent access over time Yes Acceptability Cultural appropriateness, safety Generally considered a dimension or part of Utilisation/Access, not a primary standalone pillar. Revision Table: Key Food Security Concepts Term Brief Explanation Food Security Consistent access to sufficient, safe, nutritious food. Availability Enough food exists. Accessibility People can get food (physically & economically). Affordability Food price is within reach. Utilisation Body uses food well (nutrition, safety). Stability Food security is maintained over time. Acceptability Food is culturally and socially suitable. Additional Information on Food Security Dimensions While Availability, Accessibility, Utilisation, and Stability are the most widely cited pillars, sometimes a fifth pillar, Agency, is added. Agency refers to the ability of individuals and groups to make their own decisions about what food they eat, how it is produced, and how it is distributed. Acceptability is often considered under the Utilisation or Accessibility pillars, ensuring food meets dietary needs and cultural preferences and is safe to consume. The core features primarily focus on the physical presence, ability to obtain, biological use, and consistency of food access, making Acceptability less commonly listed as a primary feature on par with the others.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 39archived

Who among the following never became the Vice President of India?

  1. A
    Gulzarilal Nanda
  2. B
    VV Giri
  3. C
    Zakir Hussain
  4. D
    BD Jatti
Show answer
A. Gulzarilal Nanda

Understanding the Role of the Vice President of India The Vice President of India is the second-highest constitutional office in the country, after the President. The Vice President acts as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha (Council of States) and can act as President in case of the President's death, resignation, impeachment, or other inability. Analyzing the Options for Vice President of India The question asks us to identify the person among the given options who never held the office of the Vice President of India. Let's look at each option: Gulzarilal Nanda: Gulzarilal Nanda was a prominent Indian politician and economist. He served as the interim Prime Minister of India twice, first after the death of Jawaharlal Nehru in 1964, and again after the death of Lal Bahadur Shastri in 1966. While he held significant political offices, we need to determine if he ever served as the Vice President. VV Giri: Varahagiri Venkata Giri, commonly known as VV Giri, was an Indian politician and activist. He held various important positions in the government before becoming a constitutional officeholder. Zakir Hussain: Zakir Hussain was an Indian educationist and politician. He served as the President of India and also held the office of Vice President before becoming President. BD Jatti: Basappa Danappa Jatti, known as BD Jatti, was an Indian politician who also held high constitutional offices. Examining the Tenure of Vice Presidents To confirm who among the options served as Vice President, let's check the historical records of the Vice Presidents of India: Dr. Zakir Hussain served as the Vice President of India from 1962 to 1967. He later became the President of India. VV Giri served as the Vice President of India from 1967 to 1969. He resigned from the post of Vice President to contest the presidential election, which he won, becoming the President of India. BD Jatti served as the Vice President of India from 1974 to 1979. He also served as the acting President of India from February to July 1977. Based on these records, VV Giri, Zakir Hussain, and BD Jatti all served as the Vice President of India during different periods. Now, let's consider Gulzarilal Nanda. As mentioned earlier, he was the interim Prime Minister of India on two occasions. His primary roles were related to the Prime Minister's office and other ministerial portfolios, but he did not serve as the Vice President of India. Conclusion Comparing the roles and tenures of the individuals listed in the options, it is clear that Gulzarilal Nanda is the person who never held the office of the Vice President of India. Name Served as Vice President? Other Notable Offices Held Gulzarilal Nanda No Interim Prime Minister of India VV Giri Yes (1967-1969) President of India Zakir Hussain Yes (1962-1967) President of India BD Jatti Yes (1974-1979) Acting President of India Revision Table: Indian Constitutional Offices Office Key Role(s) Current Holder President of India Head of State, Commander-in-Chief Droupadi Murmu Vice President of India Chairman of Rajya Sabha, Acts as President in vacancy Jagdeep Dhankhar Prime Minister of India Head of Government Narendra Modi Additional Information: The Vice Presidency of India The Vice President is elected by members of an electoral college consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament (Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha) in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote. The term of office for the Vice President is five years. A person is eligible for election as Vice President if they are a citizen of India, have completed 35 years of age, and are qualified for election as a member of the Rajya Sabha.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 40archived

Halogens have ______ electrons in their outermost shells.

  1. A
    five
  2. B
    six
  3. C
    eight
  4. D
    seven
Show answer
D. seven

Understanding the electron configuration of elements is key to predicting their chemical behavior. The question asks about the number of electrons in the outermost shell of halogens. Let's break this down. What are Halogens? Understanding Group 17 Elements Halogens are a group of chemical elements found in Group 17 of the periodic table. This group includes Fluorine (F), Chlorine (Cl), Bromine (Br), Iodine (I), Astatine (At), and Tennessine (Ts). These elements are known for being highly reactive, particularly Fluorine and Chlorine. Valence Electrons Explained The outermost electron shell of an atom is called the valence shell. The electrons in this shell are called valence electrons. These valence electrons are the ones involved in forming chemical bonds with other atoms. The number of valence electrons largely determines an element's chemical properties. Electron Configuration of Halogens The elements in a vertical column (group) of the periodic table typically have the same number of valence electrons. This is why they share similar chemical properties. Group 17 elements, the halogens, all have an electron configuration that results in the same number of electrons in their outermost shell. Let's look at the electron configuration of a few halogens: Fluorine (F), Atomic number 9: $1s^2 2s^2 2p^5$. The outermost shell is the 2nd shell ($n=2$), which contains $2 + 5 = 7$ electrons. Chlorine (Cl), Atomic number 17: $1s^2 2s^2 2p^6 3s^2 3p^5$. The outermost shell is the 3rd shell ($n=3$), which contains $2 + 5 = 7$ electrons. Bromine (Br), Atomic number 35: $1s^2 2s^2 2p^6 3s^2 3p^6 3d^{10} 4s^2 4p^5$. The outermost shell is the 4th shell ($n=4$), which contains $2 + 5 = 7$ electrons. As you can see, regardless of the period they are in, halogens consistently have 7 electrons in their outermost shell. Determining the Number of Outermost Electrons The group number (for p-block elements like halogens) often gives a clue about the number of valence electrons. For Groups 13 through 18, the number of valence electrons is usually the group number minus 10. For Group 17 halogens, this would be $17 - 10 = 7$. This aligns with the electron configurations we examined. Therefore, halogens have seven electrons in their outermost shells. Revision Table: Halogen Properties Element Symbol Atomic Number Group Period Valence Electrons Fluorine F 9 17 2 7 Chlorine Cl 17 17 3 7 Bromine Br 35 17 4 7 Iodine I 53 17 5 7 Additional Information: Chemical Reactivity and the Octet Rule The 7 valence electrons in halogens make them highly reactive. Atoms tend to gain, lose, or share electrons to achieve a stable electron configuration, typically one with a full outermost shell (like that of noble gases, which have 8 valence electrons, following the octet rule, except for Helium). With 7 valence electrons, halogens are just one electron short of a full octet. They have a strong tendency to gain one electron to achieve this stable configuration, forming a halide ion with a -1 charge (e.g., F<sup>-</sup>, Cl<sup>-</sup>). This strong desire to gain an electron is why halogens are powerful oxidizing agents. Understanding valence electrons helps explain why elements in the same group have similar chemical properties and how they will react with other elements.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 41archived

Who among the following is the author of the book 'Democrats and Dissenters'?

  1. A
    Arun Shourie
  2. B
    Ramchandra Guha
  3. C
    Nalini Singh
  4. D
    Gurucharan Das
Show answer
B. Ramchandra Guha

Understanding the Author of 'Democrats and Dissenters' The question asks to identify the author of the book titled 'Democrats and Dissenters'. Identifying the author of a specific book requires knowledge of literature and political commentary, especially concerning Indian democracy and its history. Analyzing the Options for 'Democrats and Dissenters' Author Let's look at the provided options: Arun Shourie Ramchandra Guha Nalini Singh Gurucharan Das These individuals are all prominent figures in Indian public life, known for their writing, journalism, or commentary on various subjects, including politics, history, and economics. Identifying the Correct Author The book 'Democrats and Dissenters' is a well-known collection of essays by a prominent Indian historian and writer. Based on literary records and publications, the author of 'Democrats and Dissenters' is Ramchandra Guha. Ramchandra Guha is a distinguished historian and biographer. His work often focuses on environmental history, social history, and the political history of modern India. 'Democrats and Dissenters' is one of his significant works, offering insights into various aspects of Indian democracy, society, and intellectual life. Eliminating Other Options Arun Shourie: A notable journalist, author, and politician. He has written many books, often critical of political and historical issues, but 'Democrats and Dissenters' is not among his works. Nalini Singh: A well-known journalist and television personality. Her work is primarily in journalism, not in authoring books like 'Democrats and Dissenters'. Gurucharan Das: An author and commentator on economics and history. While a prolific writer, 'Democrats and Dissenters' is not authored by him. Conclusion Based on the analysis, the author of the book 'Democrats and Dissenters' is Ramchandra Guha. The final answer is Ramchandra Guha. Revision Table: Key Details on 'Democrats and Dissenters' Book Title Democrats and Dissenters Author Ramchandra Guha Genre/Subject Essays, Indian Politics, History, Society Additional Information: About Ramchandra Guha Ramchandra Guha is a highly acclaimed Indian historian. His research interests are diverse, covering environmental history, cricket history, and the history of post-independent India. Some of his other prominent books include: India After Gandhi: The History of the World's Largest Democracy Gandhi Before India Gandhi: The Years that Changed the World A Corner of a Foreign Field: The Indian History of a British Sport His work is recognized internationally, and he has received numerous awards for his contributions to history and literature. 'Democrats and Dissenters' reflects his deep engagement with the complexities of Indian democracy and the role of intellectual discourse within it.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 42archived

Which of the following locations has the highest altitude?

  1. A
    Rajasthan
  2. B
    Uttar Pradesh
  3. C
    Himachal Pradesh
  4. D
    Uttarakhand
Show answer
D. Uttarakhand

Understanding Altitude and Indian States The question asks us to identify which of the given Indian states has the highest altitude. Altitude refers to the height of a location above sea level. Different states in India have varied geographical features, leading to significant differences in their altitudes. Let's examine the options provided: Rajasthan Uttar Pradesh Himachal Pradesh Uttarakhand Analysing the Altitude of Each State Let's briefly look at the typical geographical characteristics and altitude range of each state: Rajasthan: Located in northwestern India, a large part of Rajasthan is covered by the Thar Desert. While it has the Aravalli Range, the overall average altitude is relatively low compared to states in the Himalayan region. Uttar Pradesh: Situated in northern India, Uttar Pradesh is predominantly a part of the vast Indo-Gangetic Plain, which is characterized by flat terrain and low altitudes. Some areas in the north border the Himalayan foothills but the majority of the state is plains. Himachal Pradesh: Located in the northern Himalayas, Himachal Pradesh is known for its mountainous terrain. It is home to several high peaks and valleys, resulting in significantly higher altitudes compared to plains states. Uttarakhand: Also located in the western Himalayas, Uttarakhand is famous for its high mountains, glaciers, and pilgrimage sites situated at high elevations. It is home to some of the highest peaks in India, including Nanda Devi. Comparing Altitude Across States Based on their geographical locations and features, the states in the Himalayan region (Himachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand) are expected to have much higher altitudes than the states in the plains or desert regions (Uttar Pradesh and Rajasthan). Between Himachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand, both are mountainous, but Uttarakhand generally contains peaks of higher elevation and a larger area with very high altitudes, being home to peaks like Nanda Devi (India's second-highest peak located entirely within the country) and Kamet. Typical Altitude Comparison of States State Predominant Geography General Altitude Range (Approximate) Rajasthan Desert, Plains, Aravalli Range Low to Moderate (Lowest points near sea level, highest around 1700m) Uttar Pradesh Indo-Gangetic Plains Low (Mostly below 300m) Himachal Pradesh Western Himalayas Moderate to Very High (From foothills <500m to peaks >6000m) Uttarakhand Western Himalayas Moderate to Very High (From foothills <300m to peaks >7000m) Conclusion on Highest Altitude Considering the presence of numerous high peaks and the extensive mountainous terrain that includes some of the highest points in India, Uttarakhand has the highest overall altitude range among the given options and contains locations with the highest elevation points. Revision Table: Key Altitude Concepts Key Altitude Concepts for Exams Term Definition Relevance to Altitude Question Altitude Height above sea level. Directly relates to the question asking for the location with the highest height above sea level. Sea Level The average level of the surface of the sea, used as a base for measuring altitudes. The reference point for altitude measurements. Himalayas A large mountain range in Asia. States located in this region (Himachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand) are known for high altitudes. Indo-Gangetic Plain A fertile plain spanning across northern India, including Uttar Pradesh. Characterized by low altitudes. Aravalli Range A mountain range in northwestern India, including parts of Rajasthan. Adds some elevation to Rajasthan, but not comparable to the Himalayas. Additional Information on Altitude and Geography Altitude is a crucial factor influencing climate, vegetation, and human life in a region. Higher altitudes generally mean lower temperatures, less oxygen, and unique ecosystems. When comparing the altitude of states, it's important to consider not just the highest point but also the general elevation profile of the state. States like Uttarakhand and Himachal Pradesh have significant portions of their area at very high elevations, whereas states like Uttar Pradesh and Rajasthan have vast areas at low elevations, even if they might have a few isolated elevated points or ranges. For competitive exams, understanding the basic geography of Indian states and their associated physical features like mountain ranges, plains, and deserts helps in answering questions related to altitude, climate, and resources.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 43archived

‘Bolak-aat’ is a ______ from the state of Karnataka.

  1. A
    painting form
  2. B
    music form
  3. C
    sculpting form
  4. D
    dance form
Show answer
D. dance form

Let's analyze the term ‘Bolak-aat’ and identify what it represents from the state of Karnataka. ‘Bolak-aat’ is a traditional art form practiced by the Kodava community (also known as Coorgis) who primarily inhabit the Kodagu district in Karnataka. Understanding Bolak-aat from Karnataka The term ‘aat’ in Kodava Takk (the language of the Kodavas) generally refers to various performances, including dances. Bolak-aat is specifically one such performance. Here's why Bolak-aat fits the description of a dance form: It involves rhythmic movements performed by men. Performers carry and strike ceremonial knives (Odi Kathi) while dancing. The dance is accompanied by traditional instruments like the Dudi (a drum). It is typically performed during festivals and social gatherings. Considering these characteristics, ‘Bolak-aat’ is clearly a form of dance, not a painting, music, or sculpting form. Why Other Options are Not Bolak-aat Painting form: Painting involves creating visual art on a surface using colours. Bolak-aat is a performance involving physical movement. Music form: Music involves sound organized in time. While Bolak-aat includes musical accompaniment, it is primarily defined by the movements of the performers, making it a dance. Sculpting form: Sculpting is the art of creating three-dimensional forms, typically by carving or moulding. Bolak-aat is a dynamic, performing art. Based on its nature, movements, and cultural context, Bolak-aat is identified as a dance form native to Karnataka, particularly associated with the Kodava community. Revision Table: Bolak-aat in Karnataka Aspect Description Name Bolak-aat Origin State Karnataka Associated Community Kodavas (Coorgis) Type of Art Form Dance Form Key Elements Male performers, ceremonial knives (Odi Kathi), Dudi drum, rhythmic movements Additional Information on Karnataka Dance Forms Karnataka is home to a rich variety of folk and classical dance forms. Understanding the diversity helps in identifying specific forms like Bolak-aat. Folk Dances: Besides Bolak-aat, other folk dances from Karnataka include Yakshagana (a classical folk theatre form), Dollu Kunitha, Gorgara Kunitha, Kamsale, and Lavani (also popular in Maharashtra). Classical Dances: The primary classical dance form from Karnataka is Bharatanatyam, which has strong roots and practitioners in the state, although its origin is Tamil Nadu. Kuchipudi also has a presence. Context Matters: Many folk dances like Bolak-aat are tied to specific communities, festivals, or rituals, reflecting the local culture and traditions. Identifying 'Bolak-aat' as a dance form requires knowledge of Karnataka's cultural practices, particularly those of the Kodava people.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 44archived

Which of the following is a work on statecraft written by Krishnadevaraya?

  1. A
    Amuktamalyada
  2. B
    Tolkappiyam
  3. C
    Karpuramanjari
  4. D
    Kadambari
Show answer
A. Amuktamalyada

Krishnadevaraya's Statecraft Work: Amuktamalyada The question asks about a significant work on statecraft attributed to the famous Vijayanagara ruler, Krishnadevaraya. Krishnadevaraya was not only a powerful emperor but also a celebrated scholar and patron of arts and literature. Understanding Krishnadevaraya's Legacy Krishnadevaraya ruled the Vijayanagara Empire from 1509 to 1529. His reign is often considered a golden age for the empire, marked by military successes, economic prosperity, and cultural flourishing. He was known for his administrative skills and his deep interest in literature and philosophy. He himself was an accomplished poet. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the given options to identify the work authored by Krishnadevaraya that deals with statecraft: Amuktamalyada: This is a major epic poem in Telugu, traditionally ascribed to Krishnadevaraya himself. It is not just a religious poem about Andal (Vishnuchitta's daughter who married Ranganayaka), but it also contains valuable insights into Krishnadevaraya's political ideas, administration, and statecraft. It describes how a king should rule, his duties, and policies. Tolkappiyam: This is an ancient Tamil grammar text, much older than Krishnadevaraya's time. It is attributed to Tolkappiyar. Karpuramanjari: This is a Prakrit play written by the poet Rajasekhara, who lived long before Krishnadevaraya. Kadambari: This is a Sanskrit prose romance written by Banabhatta in the 7th century CE, part of the Harshavardhana era. Amuktamalyada and Statecraft Among the given options, Amuktamalyada stands out as the work by Krishnadevaraya. While it is a literary work, it contains significant sections detailing royal duties, governance principles, and advice on ruling a kingdom effectively. These sections are considered a treatise on statecraft from Krishnadevaraya's perspective. The text touches upon various aspects of governance, including: The importance of appointing capable ministers. The need for a king to be vigilant and just. Policies concerning taxation and justice. The relationship between the king and his subjects. Strategic considerations for the security and prosperity of the state. Therefore, Amuktamalyada is the correct answer as it is a work by Krishnadevaraya that includes detailed discussions on statecraft. Work Author Language Period Content Relevant to Statecraft Amuktamalyada Krishnadevaraya Telugu c. 16th Century CE Yes (Includes advice on governance, royal duties, and statecraft) Tolkappiyam Tolkappiyar Tamil Ancient (pre-Christian era) No (Primarily grammar and linguistics) Karpuramanjari Rajasekhara Prakrit c. 10th Century CE No (A play) Kadambari Banabhatta Sanskrit c. 7th Century CE No (A prose romance) Conclusion Based on the analysis, the work on statecraft written by Krishnadevaraya is Amuktamalyada. Revision Table: Krishnadevaraya and His Works Aspect Details Ruler Krishnadevaraya Empire Vijayanagara Empire Reign Period 1509 – 1529 CE Key Work (Statecraft) Amuktamalyada Language of Amuktamalyada Telugu Additional Information on Vijayanagara Statecraft Krishnadevaraya's reign and the Vijayanagara administration are well-documented sources for understanding statecraft in medieval South India. The empire had a complex administrative structure aimed at efficient governance, revenue collection, and military strength. Works like Amuktamalyada provide direct insights into the ideals and principles that guided rulers like Krishnadevaraya. Key features of Vijayanagara statecraft included: Strong central authority under the king. Division of the empire into administrative units (like provinces or mandalams). Efficient revenue system, primarily based on land tax. Maintenance of a large and well-organized army. Patronage of arts, literature, and religion as part of royal duty. Diplomacy and trade relations with foreign powers. Amuktamalyada serves as a valuable primary source for understanding the political philosophy and administrative practices favored by Krishnadevaraya, making it a significant work not just literarily but also historically.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 45archived

When is National Girl Child Day observed annually in India?

  1. A
    5 June
  2. B
    12 May
  3. C
    24 January
  4. D
    9 September
Show answer
C. 24 January

Understanding National Girl Child Day in India The question asks about the specific date when National Girl Child Day is celebrated each year in India. This is an important day dedicated to raising awareness about the rights of girl children and addressing the inequalities they face. What is National Girl Child Day? National Girl Child Day is an annual observance in India aimed at promoting awareness about the rights of the girl child and highlighting the challenges girls face, such as inequality, discrimination, exploitation, and lack of access to education and healthcare. The day promotes the importance of the girl child's education, health, and nutrition. When is National Girl Child Day Observed? National Girl Child Day is observed every year on a specific date across India. This date was fixed by the Ministry of Women and Child Development. The correct date for National Girl Child Day in India is January 24th. This day is used to launch various campaigns and programs across the country to empower girls and promote gender equality. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the options provided: 5 June: This date is observed as World Environment Day. 12 May: This date is observed as International Nurses Day. 24 January: This date is observed as National Girl Child Day in India. 9 September: This date does not correspond to National Girl Child Day. Based on the official observance in India, the correct date for National Girl Child Day is 24 January. Significance of the Day Celebrating National Girl Child Day on 24 January serves several key purposes: Raising awareness about the value and potential of the girl child. Highlighting issues like child marriage, gender-based violence, and discrimination. Promoting the importance of educating and empowering girls. Encouraging society to provide equal opportunities for girls. Key Date Summary Observance Date Location National Girl Child Day January 24 India Revision Table: Important Days Comparison of Dates Date Observance 5 June World Environment Day 12 May International Nurses Day 24 January National Girl Child Day (India) 9 September No major related observance Additional Information: Related Initiatives for Girl Child The Indian government has launched several initiatives to support the girl child, aligning with the spirit of National Girl Child Day. One prominent example is the Beti Bachao Beti Padhao (Save the Daughter, Educate the Daughter) scheme. This scheme aims to address the issue of declining Child Sex Ratio (CSR) and promote gender equality by ensuring that girls are born, nurtured, and educated. Key aspects of the Beti Bachao Beti Padhao scheme often discussed in relation to National Girl Child Day include: Preventing gender-biased sex selection. Ensuring survival and protection of the girl child. Ensuring education and participation of the girl child. These initiatives underscore the ongoing efforts to create a conducive environment where every girl child can thrive and reach her full potential.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 46archived

Tapovan Vishnugad Hydroelectric Project is located in:

  1. A
    Himachal Pradesh
  2. B
    Ladakh
  3. C
    Uttarakhand
  4. D
    Jammu and Kashmir
Show answer
C. Uttarakhand

The question asks about the geographical location of the Tapovan Vishnugad Hydroelectric Project. This is a significant infrastructure project related to energy generation in India. Tapovan Vishnugad Hydroelectric Project Location The Tapovan Vishnugad Hydroelectric Project is situated in the northern part of India, specifically in the state of Uttarakhand. Uttarakhand is known for its mountainous terrain and numerous rivers, making it suitable for hydroelectric power generation. Key details about its location: State: Uttarakhand District: Chamoli District River: Built on the Dhauliganga River, which is a tributary of the Alaknanda River. Near: The project is located near Tapovan in the Chamoli district of Uttarakhand. Understanding the location of such projects is important for geography and general awareness. Hydroelectric projects like Tapovan Vishnugad harness the energy of flowing water to generate electricity, contributing to the power supply of the region and the country. Understanding Hydroelectric Projects in Uttarakhand Uttarakhand is a state with significant potential for hydroelectric power due to its topography and river systems originating from the Himalayas. Several hydroelectric projects are located across the state, contributing substantially to its energy profile. The Tapovan Vishnugad project is one of them, contributing to the renewable energy landscape. The project involves diverting river water through tunnels to power turbines and generate electricity. Its location in the mountainous region presents both opportunities for power generation and challenges related to construction and environmental impact. Feature Detail Project Name Tapovan Vishnugad Hydroelectric Project Location State Uttarakhand Location District Chamoli River Dhauliganga Type Run-of-river hydroelectric plant Purpose Electricity generation Revision Table: Tapovan Vishnugad Details Aspect Information Project Name Tapovan Vishnugad Hydroelectric Project State Uttarakhand District Chamoli River Dhauliganga Additional Information: Hydroelectric Power in India India has significant hydroelectric power potential, especially in the Himalayan region and the Western Ghats. Hydroelectric power is a renewable source of energy, meaning it is replenished naturally over time. It plays a crucial role in India's energy mix, helping to meet the growing demand for electricity while reducing dependence on fossil fuels. However, hydroelectric projects, particularly large ones in sensitive ecological zones like the Himalayas, often involve complex environmental and social considerations. Careful planning and execution are required to minimize potential negative impacts.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 47archived

How many trains were flagged off by Prime Minister Narendra Modi in January 2021 connecting the location of the Statue of Unity to different parts of India?

  1. A
    Eight
  2. B
    Six
  3. C
    Seven
  4. D
    Five
Show answer
A. Eight

Examining Statue of Unity Train Connectivity The question asks about the number of trains flagged off by Prime Minister Narendra Modi in January 2021 to connect the location of the Statue of Unity to various parts of India. This initiative was a significant step towards boosting tourism and improving access to the Statue of Unity located near Kevadiya, Gujarat. Prime Minister Flags Off Connectivity Trains In January 2021, Prime Minister Narendra Modi virtually flagged off multiple trains. The primary goal was to provide direct rail connectivity from different regions of the country to Kevadiya, the town closest to the Statue of Unity. Number of Trains Flagged Off in January 2021 During the event in January 2021, a total of eight trains were flagged off. These trains were introduced to enhance rail connectivity to the Statue of Unity from different major cities across India. The introduction of these eight trains significantly improved the ease of travel for tourists and visitors wishing to visit the Statue of Unity, one of the major attractions in Gujarat. Details of the Connectivity Initiative The eight trains connect Kevadiya to several important destinations. This widespread connectivity ensures that people from various states can easily access the Statue of Unity by train. Here are the key aspects of this initiative: Location: Kevadiya, near the Statue of Unity. Date: January 2021. Action: Flagging off of new train services. Number of Trains: Eight. Purpose: To enhance connectivity and promote tourism to the Statue of Unity. The flagging off of these eight trains in January 2021 was a major infrastructure development aimed at putting the Statue of Unity prominently on India's tourism map with better rail access. Revision Table: Statue of Unity Connectivity Aspect Detail Event Flagging off of new trains Location Connected To Statue of Unity (Kevadiya) Date January 2021 Number of Trains Eight Objective Enhance connectivity & tourism Additional Information on Statue of Unity Connectivity The rail connectivity project is part of a larger effort to develop the Kevadiya region as a major tourist hub. Besides rail, efforts have been made to improve road and air connectivity as well. The introduction of these eight trains from diverse locations like Varanasi, Mumbai (Dadar), Ahmedabad, Delhi (Hazrath Nizamuddin), Rewa, Chennai, and Pratapnagar highlights the nationwide focus on connecting people to this landmark. The railway station at Kevadiya itself is designed with modern amenities to handle increased passenger traffic.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 48archived

Which part of the body is associated with the rickets disorder?

  1. A
    Heart
  2. B
    Skin
  3. C
    Bones
  4. D
    Eyes
Show answer
C. Bones

Understanding Rickets and Body Associations The question asks about the body part primarily associated with the disorder known as Rickets. Rickets is a condition that affects bone development in children. It leads to weak, soft bones that can become deformed. This disorder is most commonly caused by a severe lack of Vitamin D, though calcium deficiency can also contribute. Vitamin D is crucial because it helps the body absorb calcium and phosphorus from food. Calcium and phosphorus are essential minerals for building strong and healthy bones. When a child doesn't get enough Vitamin D (or calcium/phosphorus), their body struggles to maintain healthy bone structure. The Primary Impact of Rickets on Bones Rickets directly impacts the skeletal system, which is made up of bones. The main problems seen in Rickets are related to how bones grow and harden: Bone Softening: Bones don't harden properly because of insufficient mineralization (deposit of calcium and phosphorus). Bone Weakening: Soft bones are weaker and more prone to bending or breaking. Bone Deformities: As the child grows and puts weight on their limbs, the soft bones can bend, leading to characteristic deformities such as bowed legs, thickened wrists and ankles, and sometimes a deformed rib cage (rickety rosary). Therefore, the bones are the part of the body most significantly affected by Rickets. Why Other Options Are Not Primarily Associated with Rickets Let's look at the other options provided: Heart: The heart is a vital organ in the circulatory system responsible for pumping blood. Rickets does not primarily affect the heart, although severe calcium imbalances can potentially impact heart function indirectly in rare cases. Skin: The skin is the body's largest organ and is involved in protecting the body, regulating temperature, and synthesizing Vitamin D when exposed to sunlight. While sunlight exposure is related to Vitamin D production, Rickets itself is a disorder of the bones, not the skin. Eyes: The eyes are organs responsible for vision. Rickets has no direct association with disorders of the eyes. Based on the direct impact and common symptoms of Rickets, it is clear that the bones are the body part most closely associated with this disorder. Summary of Rickets and Body Parts Here is a quick look at the association: Body Part Primary Association with Rickets Heart No direct primary association Skin No direct primary association (involved in Vitamin D synthesis, but not the site of the disorder) Bones Primary association (softening, weakening, deformity) Eyes No direct primary association The characteristic signs of Rickets are observed in the skeletal structure, confirming that the bones are the affected part. Revision Table: Key Facts about Rickets Topic Detail What is Rickets? Bone development disorder in children Affected Body Part Bones Primary Cause Vitamin D deficiency (also calcium/phosphorus) How it affects bones Bones become soft, weak, and can deform Symptoms Bowed legs, thickened joints (wrists, ankles), chest deformities, delayed growth Additional Information: Rickets and Bone Health Understanding Rickets involves understanding the importance of Vitamin D and minerals for bone health. Here are some related points: Vitamin D Sources: The body produces Vitamin D when skin is exposed to sunlight. It can also be obtained from certain foods (like fatty fish) and fortified foods (milk, cereals) or supplements. Calcium and Phosphorus: These minerals are the building blocks of bone structure. Vitamin D helps the gut absorb them efficiently. Osteomalacia: This is a similar condition that affects adults. Like Rickets in children, Osteomalacia causes softening of the bones, also due to Vitamin D or mineral deficiencies. Prevention: Ensuring adequate Vitamin D intake through diet, supplements, and safe sun exposure is key to preventing Rickets. Calcium-rich foods are also important. In conclusion, Rickets is fundamentally a bone disorder caused by inadequate mineralization of the growing skeleton, primarily due to Vitamin D deficiency.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 49archived

India and ______ were declared joint winners of the 2020 Online FIDE Chess Olympiad.

  1. A
    Serbia
  2. B
    The US
  3. C
    Estonia
  4. D
    Russia
Show answer
D. Russia

Understanding the 2020 Online FIDE Chess Olympiad Joint Winners The FIDE Chess Olympiad is a biennial chess tournament where teams from different countries compete. In 2020, due to the global situation, a special online edition of the event was held. The question asks about the countries that were declared joint winners of the 2020 Online FIDE Chess Olympiad. The final match of the 2020 Online FIDE Chess Olympiad was held between India and Russia. Unfortunately, the final match was affected by internet outages and server issues experienced by some Indian players. Following these technical difficulties, the International Chess Federation (FIDE) decided to declare both teams as joint winners. Therefore, India and Russia were the joint winners of the 2020 Online FIDE Chess Olympiad. Let's look at the options provided: Serbia The US Estonia Russia Based on the outcome of the final match and FIDE's decision, Russia was the country that shared the title with India. Revision Table: 2020 Online FIDE Chess Olympiad Key Facts Event Format Finalists Outcome 2020 FIDE Chess Olympiad Online India vs. Russia Joint Winners (India & Russia) Additional Information: FIDE and Chess Olympiads What is FIDE? FIDE stands for Fédération Internationale des Échecs, which is the International Chess Federation. It is the governing body of the sport of chess, and it regulates all international competition. FIDE was founded in Paris, France, on July 20, 1924. What is the Chess Olympiad? The Chess Olympiad is a biennial team chess tournament organized by FIDE. National teams from all over the world participate in the tournament. It is considered one of the most important chess events globally. Why was the 2020 event online? The 2020 event was held online due to the challenges posed by the global COVID-19 pandemic, which made organizing an over-the-board event difficult and unsafe. How did the joint win happen? In the final match between India and Russia, severe internet connectivity issues affected some Indian players during the crucial stages. After reviewing the situation, FIDE decided that the fairest outcome was to declare both teams as joint champions, rather than awarding a sole victory based on a match affected by external technical problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 50archived

Who among the following was appointed as the Chairman and Managing Director of Telecommunications Consultants India Limited in January 2021?

  1. A
    Rajeev kumar
  2. B
    Sarabjit Singh sandhu
  3. C
    Sanjeev kumar
  4. D
    Jitendra Singh
Show answer
C. Sanjeev kumar

Understanding the TCIL Appointment Question This question asks about a significant appointment in a key public sector undertaking (PSU) in India, specifically Telecommunications Consultants India Limited (TCIL). Appointments to top leadership positions like Chairman and Managing Director are important updates for general knowledge and current affairs sections of competitive exams. The question specifies the organization, TCIL, and the timeframe, January 2021, asking for the name of the person appointed as Chairman and Managing Director (CMD) during this period. Identifying the Appointee at TCIL in January 2021 Based on official records and news reports from January 2021, Shri Sanjeev Kumar was appointed as the Chairman and Managing Director (CMD) of Telecommunications Consultants India Limited (TCIL). His appointment was a notable event in the telecommunications sector, involving a major government-owned consultancy and engineering company. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the provided options: Rajeev kumar Sarabjit Singh sandhu Sanjeev kumar Jitendra Singh Comparing the information about the actual appointment in January 2021 with the given options, we find that the name Sanjeev Kumar matches one of the options. Conclusion on the TCIL Appointment The person appointed as the Chairman and Managing Director of Telecommunications Consultants India Limited (TCIL) in January 2021 was Sanjeev Kumar. Therefore, the option that correctly identifies Sanjeev Kumar is the appropriate answer to this question about the TCIL CMD appointment. Organisation Position Appointee (January 2021) Telecommunications Consultants India Limited (TCIL) Chairman & Managing Director (CMD) Sanjeev Kumar Revision Table: Key Appointments Organisation Position Appointee Period/Context Telecommunications Consultants India Limited (TCIL) CMD Sanjeev Kumar Appointed Jan 2021 (Example) State Bank of India (SBI) Chairman Dinesh Kumar Khara Assumed office Oct 2020 (Example) (Example) Steel Authority of India Limited (SAIL) Chairman Soma Mondal Assumed charge Jan 2021 (Example) Additional Information on Telecommunications Consultants India Limited (TCIL) TCIL is a premier public sector undertaking under the Ministry of Communications, Government of India. It was established in 1978. TCIL provides telecommunication consultancy and engineering services in India and internationally. Its services include: Network planning and design Software development E-governance projects Civil construction for telecom infrastructure Appointments to leadership roles in PSUs like TCIL are made through specific government procedures and are crucial for the organization's strategic direction and operational efficiency.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 51archived

Ratio of the present age of a mother to that of the daughter is 7 ∶ 1. After 5 years the ratio will become 4 ∶ 1. What is the difference (in years) in their present ages?

  1. A
    30
  2. B
    31
  3. C
    28
  4. D
    29
Show answer
A. 30

Given: The current age ratio of mother and daughter = 7 : 1 After 5 years, the ratio will be = 4 : 1 Calculation: Let the current age be x. Then, According to the given question ⇒ (7x + 5)/(x + 5) = 4/1 ⇒ 7x + 5 = 4x + 20 ⇒ 3x = 15 ⇒ x = 5 Mother's current age = 7x = 7 × 5 = 35 years Daughter's current age = x = 5 years Required difference = (35 – 5) = 30 years ∴ The difference in their current ages is 30 years.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 52archived

If 3cos 2θ - 4sinθ + 1 = 0, 0° < θ < 90°, then tanθ + secθ = ?

  1. A
    2√5
  2. B
    3√3
  3. C
    2√3
  4. D
    √5
Show answer
D. √5

The correct answer is √5. Since sinθ = Opposite / Hypotenuse = 2/3, we have: Using the Pythagorean theorem (Adjacent² + Opposite² = Hypotenuse²): Adjacent² + 2² = 3² Adjacent² + 4 = 9 Adjacent² = 5 Adjacent = √5 Now we can find tanθ and secθ: Step 6: Calculate the final answer. tanθ + secθ = (2 / √5) + (3 / √5) tanθ + secθ = (2 + 3) / √5 tanθ + secθ = 5 / √5 To rationalize the denominator, multiply the numerator and denominator by √5: (5 / √5) * (√5 / √5) = 5√5 / 5 = √5 The final answer is √5 .

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 53archived

What is the area (in cm 2) of circle inscribed in a square of area 784 cm 2? (Take π = 22/7)

  1. A
    616
  2. B
    462
  3. C
    660
  4. D
    924
Show answer
A. 616

Finding the Area of a Circle Inscribed in a Square The question asks for the area of a circle that is perfectly fitted inside a square. We are given the area of the square and need to find the area of the inscribed circle. To find the area of the circle, we first need to determine its radius. The key relationship here is that when a circle is inscribed in a square, the diameter of the circle is equal to the side length of the square. Step 1: Calculate the Side Length of the Square The area of the square is given as 784 cm2. The formula for the area of a square is: Area = (Side)2 So, to find the side length, we take the square root of the area: Side = $\sqrt{\text{Area}}$ Side = $\sqrt{784 \text{ cm}^2}$ Let's calculate the square root of 784: $\sqrt{784} = 28$ So, the side length of the square is 28 cm. Step 2: Determine the Diameter of the Inscribed Circle For a circle inscribed in a square, the diameter of the circle is equal to the side length of the square. Diameter of circle = Side length of square Diameter of circle = 28 cm Step 3: Calculate the Radius of the Inscribed Circle The radius of a circle is half of its diameter. Radius (r) = Diameter / 2 Radius (r) = 28 cm / 2 Radius (r) = 14 cm Step 4: Calculate the Area of the Inscribed Circle The formula for the area of a circle is $\text{Area} = \pi r^2$. We are asked to use $\pi = 22/7$. Area of circle = $\pi r^2$ Area of circle = $\frac{22}{7} \times (14 \text{ cm})^2$ Area of circle = $\frac{22}{7} \times (14 \times 14) \text{ cm}^2$ Area of circle = $\frac{22}{7} \times 196 \text{ cm}^2$ Now, we can simplify by dividing 196 by 7: $196 \div 7 = 28$ Area of circle = $22 \times 28 \text{ cm}^2$ Let's multiply 22 by 28: $22 \times 28 = 616$ Area of circle = 616 cm2. Final Answer Check The calculated area of the inscribed circle is 616 cm2. This matches one of the given options. Summary of Calculations Given Area of Square = 784 cm2 Calculated Side of Square $\sqrt{784} = 28$ cm Diameter of Inscribed Circle Equal to Side of Square = 28 cm Radius of Inscribed Circle Diameter / 2 = 14 cm Calculated Area of Circle $\pi r^2 = \frac{22}{7} \times 14^2 = 616$ cm2 Geometry Formulas Revision It's helpful to remember these basic geometry formulas for solving problems involving squares and circles: Area of a square = side $\times$ side = side2 Perimeter of a square = 4 $\times$ side Area of a circle = $\pi r^2$ Circumference of a circle = $2\pi r = \pi d$ (where r is radius, d is diameter) Relationship between radius and diameter: $d = 2r$ or $r = d/2$ Additional Information: Understanding Inscribed Shapes When one geometric shape is inscribed in another, it means the inner shape fits exactly inside the outer shape, often touching the boundaries of the outer shape at multiple points. Circle inscribed in a Square: The largest possible circle that can fit inside a square has a diameter equal to the side length of the square. The circle touches all four sides of the square. Square inscribed in a Circle: The largest possible square that can fit inside a circle has vertices (corners) that lie on the circumference of the circle. The diagonal of the square in this case is equal to the diameter of the circle. Understanding these relationships is crucial for solving geometry problems involving inscribed and circumscribed shapes.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 54archived

In Δ ABC, ∠A = 90°, AD ⊥ BC at D. If AB = 12 cm and AC = 16 cm, then what is the length of BD?

  1. A
    6.4
  2. B
    7.2
  3. C
    7.8
  4. D
    8.4
Show answer
B. 7.2

Understanding the Problem: Calculating BD Length in a Right Triangle The question asks us to find the length of the segment BD in a right-angled triangle ABC. We are given that the triangle is right-angled at A, and AD is the altitude drawn from the right angle A to the hypotenuse BC. The lengths of the two legs, AB and AC, are provided. Given Information: Triangle ABC is a right-angled triangle with ∠A = 90°. AD is the altitude from A to BC, so AD ⊥ BC at D. AB = 12 cm AC = 16 cm We need to find the length of BD. Step-by-Step Solution to Find BD Step 1: Find the length of the hypotenuse BC In the right-angled triangle ABC, we can use the Pythagorean theorem to find the length of the hypotenuse BC. The Pythagorean theorem states that in a right-angled triangle, the square of the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides. Applying the Pythagorean theorem to Δ ABC: \[ BC^2 = AB^2 + AC^2 \] Substitute the given values for AB and AC: \[ BC^2 = (12 \, \text{cm})^2 + (16 \, \text{cm})^2 \] \[ BC^2 = 144 \, \text{cm}^2 + 256 \, \text{cm}^2 \] \[ BC^2 = 400 \, \text{cm}^2 \] Taking the square root of both sides: \[ BC = \sqrt{400 \, \text{cm}^2} \] \[ BC = 20 \, \text{cm} \] So, the length of the hypotenuse BC is 20 cm. Step 2: Recognize Similar Triangles formed by the Altitude When an altitude is drawn from the vertex of the right angle to the hypotenuse in a right-angled triangle, it divides the triangle into two smaller triangles that are similar to the original triangle and also similar to each other. In this case, the altitude AD divides Δ ABC into Δ DBA and Δ DAC. These three triangles are similar: Δ ABC ∼ Δ DBA Δ ABC ∼ Δ DAC Δ DBA ∼ Δ DAC We can use the similarity between Δ ABC and Δ DBA to find the length of BD. Let's consider Δ ABC and Δ DBA: ∠B is common to both triangles. ∠BAC = 90° (given) and ∠BDA = 90° (since AD is an altitude). Since two angles are equal, the third angle must also be equal, so Δ ABC is similar to Δ DBA by AA similarity. Step 3: Use Proportionality of Sides in Similar Triangles Because Δ ABC ∼ Δ DBA, the ratio of their corresponding sides is equal. Let's list the corresponding sides: Side opposite ∠B in Δ ABC is AC. Side opposite ∠B in Δ DBA is AD. (AC/AD) Side opposite ∠BAC (90°) in Δ ABC is BC. Side opposite ∠BDA (90°) in Δ DBA is AB. (BC/AB) Side opposite ∠C in Δ ABC is AB. Side opposite ∠BAD in Δ DBA is BD. (AB/BD) Thus, we have the proportionality: \[ \frac{AC}{AD} = \frac{BC}{AB} = \frac{AB}{BD} \] We want to find BD, and we know AB and BC. So, we can use the ratio: \[ \frac{BC}{AB} = \frac{AB}{BD} \] Step 4: Solve for BD Substitute the known values BC = 20 cm and AB = 12 cm into the proportion: \[ \frac{20 \, \text{cm}}{12 \, \text{cm}} = \frac{12 \, \text{cm}}{BD} \] Now, cross-multiply to solve for BD: \[ 20 \times BD = 12 \times 12 \] \[ 20 \times BD = 144 \] Divide by 20: \[ BD = \frac{144}{20} \] \[ BD = \frac{72}{10} \] \[ BD = 7.2 \, \text{cm} \] The length of BD is 7.2 cm. Summary of Calculation We used the Pythagorean theorem to find the hypotenuse BC and then applied the property of similar triangles formed by the altitude to set up a proportion and find the length of BD. Calculations: \(BC = \sqrt{12^2 + 16^2} = \sqrt{144 + 256} = \sqrt{400} = 20\) cm Using similarity Δ ABC ∼ Δ DBA: \(\frac{BC}{AB} = \frac{AB}{BD}\) \(\frac{20}{12} = \frac{12}{BD}\) \(20 \times BD = 144\) \(BD = \frac{144}{20} = 7.2\) cm Calculation Steps for BD Step Description Calculation Result 1 Calculate Hypotenuse BC (Pythagorean Theorem) \(BC = \sqrt{AB^2 + AC^2}\) \(BC = 20\) cm 2 Identify Similar Triangles (Δ ABC ∼ Δ DBA) AA Similarity (∠B, ∠90°) Proportion \(BC/AB = AB/BD\) 3 Substitute Values and Solve for BD \(20/12 = 12/BD\) \(BD = 7.2\) cm Revision Table: Key Concepts in Right Triangle Geometry Important Formulas and Properties Concept Description/Formula Application in this Problem Pythagorean Theorem In a right triangle with legs a, b and hypotenuse c: \(a^2 + b^2 = c^2\) Used to find the hypotenuse BC. Altitude to Hypotenuse An altitude from the right angle to the hypotenuse divides the triangle into two similar triangles, both similar to the original. Used to establish similarity Δ ABC ∼ Δ DBA. Similar Triangles Property Corresponding sides of similar triangles are proportional. Used the ratio \(AB/BD = BC/AB\) to find BD. Geometric Mean Theorem (Altitude) \(AD^2 = BD \times DC\) Not directly used here, but related property. Geometric Mean Theorem (Leg) \(AB^2 = BD \times BC\) \(AC^2 = CD \times BC\) \(AB^2 = BD \times BC\) directly applicable. \(12^2 = BD \times 20 \implies 144 = 20 \times BD \implies BD = 144/20 = 7.2\) Additional Information: Understanding Similar Triangles Similar triangles are triangles that have the same shape but not necessarily the same size. This means that their corresponding angles are equal, and the ratio of their corresponding sides is constant. This constant ratio is called the scale factor. Conditions for Similarity: AA (Angle-Angle) Similarity: If two angles of one triangle are congruent to two angles of another triangle, then the triangles are similar. This is what we used (∠B is common, and both have a 90° angle). SSS (Side-Side-Side) Similarity: If the corresponding sides of two triangles are proportional, then the triangles are similar. SAS (Side-Angle-Side) Similarity: If two sides of one triangle are proportional to two corresponding sides of another triangle, and the included angles are congruent, then the triangles are similar. In right-angled triangles with an altitude to the hypotenuse, the similarity relationships are particularly useful for finding unknown lengths using proportions or the geometric mean theorems (as noted in the revision table). The property \(AB^2 = BD \times BC\) is a direct consequence of the similarity Δ ABC ∼ Δ DBA.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 55archived

A train runs first 75 km at a certain uniform speed and next 90 km at an average speed of 10 km/h more than the normal speed. If it takes 3 hours to complete the journey, then how much time will the train take to cover 300 km with normal speed?

  1. A
    5 hours
  2. B
    5 hours 15 minutes
  3. C
    6 hours
  4. D
    5 hours 25 minutes
Show answer
C. 6 hours

Train Speed Problem: Calculating Journey Time This problem involves a train traveling different distances at varying speeds and requires us to find the time taken to cover a specific distance at its normal speed. We are given the total time for a journey composed of two parts with different speeds relative to the normal speed. Understanding the Problem Components First part of the journey: 75 km at a certain uniform speed (normal speed). Second part of the journey: 90 km at an average speed 10 km/h more than the normal speed. Total time taken for the entire journey (75 km + 90 km): 3 hours. Goal: Find the time taken to cover 300 km at the normal speed. Step-by-Step Solution for Train Speed Calculation Step 1: Define the Normal Speed Let the normal speed of the train be \(v\) km/h. Step 2: Calculate Time Taken for Each Part of the Journey We know that Time = Distance / Speed. Time taken for the first 75 km (at normal speed \(v\)): \(T_1 = \frac{\text{Distance}_1}{\text{Speed}_1} = \frac{75}{v}\) hours. The speed for the next 90 km is 10 km/h more than the normal speed, which is \(v + 10\) km/h. Time taken for the next 90 km (at speed \(v + 10\)): \(T_2 = \frac{\text{Distance}_2}{\text{Speed}_2} = \frac{90}{v + 10}\) hours. Step 3: Set up the Equation Using Total Time The total time for the 75 km and 90 km journey is given as 3 hours. \(T_1 + T_2 = \text{Total Time}\) \(\frac{75}{v} + \frac{90}{v + 10} = 3\) Step 4: Solve the Equation for the Normal Speed \(v\) To solve this equation, we need to find a common denominator, which is \(v(v + 10)\). Multiply each term by \(v(v + 10)\) to eliminate the denominators: \(v(v + 10) \left( \frac{75}{v} \right) + v(v + 10) \left( \frac{90}{v + 10} \right) = 3 \cdot v(v + 10)\) \(75(v + 10) + 90v = 3v(v + 10)\) \(75v + 750 + 90v = 3v^2 + 30v\) Combine like terms and rearrange into a quadratic equation: \(165v + 750 = 3v^2 + 30v\) \(0 = 3v^2 + 30v - 165v - 750\) \(0 = 3v^2 - 135v - 750\) Divide the entire equation by 3 to simplify: \(0 = v^2 - 45v - 250\) Now, solve the quadratic equation \(v^2 - 45v - 250 = 0\). We can factor this quadratic equation. We look for two numbers that multiply to -250 and add up to -45. These numbers are -50 and 5. \((v - 50)(v + 5) = 0\) This gives two possible solutions for \(v\): \(v - 50 = 0 \Rightarrow v = 50\) \(v + 5 = 0 \Rightarrow v = -5\) Since speed cannot be negative, the normal speed of the train is \(v = 50\) km/h. Step 5: Calculate Time to Cover 300 km at Normal Speed Now that we know the normal speed is 50 km/h, we can find the time it takes to cover 300 km at this speed. Time = Distance / Speed \(\text{Time} = \frac{300 \text{ km}}{50 \text{ km/h}}\) \(\text{Time} = 6\) hours. Verification (Optional but Recommended) Let's check if a normal speed of 50 km/h satisfies the original conditions: Time for first 75 km at 50 km/h: \(75/50 = 1.5\) hours. Speed for the next 90 km: \(50 + 10 = 60\) km/h. Time for next 90 km at 60 km/h: \(90/60 = 1.5\) hours. Total time: \(1.5 + 1.5 = 3\) hours. This matches the given information, confirming our normal speed calculation is correct. Conclusion on Train Journey Time The train takes 6 hours to cover 300 km with its normal speed of 50 km/h. Journey Segment Distance (km) Speed (km/h) Time (hours) First Part 75 Normal speed (\(v\)) \(75/v\) Second Part 90 Normal speed + 10 (\(v+10\)) \(90/(v+10)\) Calculated \(v=50\) 75 50 \(75/50 = 1.5\) Calculated \(v=50\) 90 \(50+10=60\) \(90/60 = 1.5\) Total Time (Verification) \(75+90=165\) N/A \(1.5+1.5=3\) Target Calculation 300 Normal speed (\(v=50\)) \(300/50 = 6\) Revision Table: Train Speed Calculations Concept Formula/Relation Application in Problem Speed, Distance, Time \( \text{Speed} = \frac{\text{Distance}}{\text{Time}} \) <br> \( \text{Time} = \frac{\text{Distance}}{\text{Speed}} \) <br> \( \text{Distance} = \text{Speed} \times \text{Time} \) Used to calculate time for each segment based on distance and speed. Total Time Sum of time for individual parts \(T_1 + T_2 = \text{Total Journey Time}\) Solving Quadratic Equations Factoring, Quadratic Formula: <br> \( v = \frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^2 - 4ac}}{2a} \) <br> for \( av^2 + bv + c = 0 \) Used to find the value of normal speed \(v\) from the equation derived from the total time. Additional Information: Speed, Distance, and Time Problems Speed, distance, and time problems are common in competitive exams and fundamental to understanding motion. The core relationship is simple: Speed is directly proportional to distance and inversely proportional to time when the other quantity is constant. Uniform Speed: This means the speed is constant throughout a particular segment of the journey. Average Speed: When speed changes during a journey, the average speed is calculated as the total distance divided by the total time. In this problem, the "average speed of 10 km/h more than the normal speed" refers to a constant speed for that specific 90 km segment, not a true average over a varying speed within that segment. Relative Speed: While not directly used here, relative speed is important when objects are moving towards or away from each other. Solving such problems often involves setting up equations based on the given information about distances, speeds, and times, and then solving for the unknown variable, typically speed or time.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 56archived

A can do a certain work in 15 days. B is 25% more efficient than A. Both worked together for 4 days. C alone completed the remaining work in 8 days. A, B and C together will complete the same work in ?

  1. A
    5 days
  2. B
    \(4\frac{1}{2}\) days
  3. C
    \(6\frac{1}{2}\) days
  4. D
    4 days
Show answer
A. 5 days

Understanding the Work and Time Problem This problem involves calculating the time taken by individuals and a group to complete a certain amount of work, based on their efficiencies. We are given information about how long A takes, B's efficiency relative to A, how long A and B work together, how long C takes to finish the remaining work, and we need to find how long A, B, and C take to complete the whole work together. Step-by-Step Solution Analysis Let's break down the problem into smaller steps: Calculate the total work. Calculate the efficiency of A. Calculate the efficiency of B based on A's efficiency. Calculate the work done by A and B together in 4 days. Calculate the remaining work. Calculate the efficiency of C using the remaining work and time C took. Calculate the combined efficiency of A, B, and C. Calculate the time taken by A, B, and C together to complete the total work. Calculating Efficiency and Total Work We are given that A can complete the work in 15 days. Assume the total work is a specific number of units. A common method is to take the number of days A takes as the total work units for simplicity if only A's time is given initially. Let's assume the total work is 15 units. A's efficiency = $\text{Total Work} / \text{Time taken by A}$ A's efficiency = $15 \text{ units} / 15 \text{ days} = 1 \text{ unit per day}$. B is 25% more efficient than A. B's efficiency = A's efficiency + 25% of A's efficiency B's efficiency = $1 \text{ unit/day} + (25/100) \times 1 \text{ unit/day}$ B's efficiency = $1 \text{ unit/day} + 0.25 \text{ unit/day} = 1.25 \text{ units per day}$. Person Efficiency (units/day) A 1 B 1.25 Work Done by A and B Together A and B worked together for 4 days. Combined efficiency of A and B = A's efficiency + B's efficiency Combined efficiency of A and B = $1 \text{ unit/day} + 1.25 \text{ units/day} = 2.25 \text{ units per day}$. Work done by A and B in 4 days = Combined efficiency $\times$ Time Work done by A and B = $2.25 \text{ units/day} \times 4 \text{ days} = 9 \text{ units}$. Calculating Remaining Work and C's Efficiency The total work is 15 units. Work done by A and B is 9 units. Remaining work = Total work - Work done by A and B Remaining work = $15 \text{ units} - 9 \text{ units} = 6 \text{ units}$. C alone completed the remaining work (6 units) in 8 days. C's efficiency = Remaining work / Time taken by C C's efficiency = $6 \text{ units} / 8 \text{ days} = 0.75 \text{ units per day}$. Person Efficiency (units/day) A 1 B 1.25 C 0.75 Time Taken by A, B, and C Together To find the time taken by A, B, and C together, we first need their combined efficiency. Combined efficiency of A, B, and C = A's efficiency + B's efficiency + C's efficiency Combined efficiency = $1 \text{ unit/day} + 1.25 \text{ units/day} + 0.75 \text{ units/day} = 3 \text{ units per day}$. The total work is 15 units. Time taken by A, B, and C together = Total work / Combined efficiency Time taken = $15 \text{ units} / 3 \text{ units/day} = 5 \text{ days}$. Thus, A, B, and C together will complete the same work in 5 days. Revision Table: Key Calculations Step Calculation Result 1. A's Efficiency $15 \text{ units} / 15 \text{ days}$ $1 \text{ unit/day}$ 2. B's Efficiency $1 + 0.25 \times 1$ $1.25 \text{ units/day}$ 3. A & B Combined Efficiency $1 + 1.25$ $2.25 \text{ units/day}$ 4. Work by A & B in 4 days $2.25 \times 4$ $9 \text{ units}$ 5. Remaining Work $15 - 9$ $6 \text{ units}$ 6. C's Efficiency $6 \text{ units} / 8 \text{ days}$ $0.75 \text{ units/day}$ 7. A, B, C Combined Efficiency $1 + 1.25 + 0.75$ $3 \text{ units/day}$ 8. Time for A, B, C together $15 \text{ units} / 3 \text{ units/day}$ $5 \text{ days}$ Additional Information: Work and Time Concepts Work and Time problems often rely on the inverse relationship between efficiency and time. Higher efficiency means less time is needed to complete the same amount of work. The total work can be considered as 1 unit (the whole task) or assigned a value (like LCM of days) to avoid fractions in efficiency calculations, as done in this solution by taking total work as 15 units. Efficiency: The amount of work done per unit of time. Total Work: The entire task to be completed. Time: The duration taken to complete the work. The fundamental formula is: $\text{Work} = \text{Efficiency} \times \text{Time}$. When multiple people work together, their efficiencies are added to find the combined efficiency. If someone works for a specific duration, the work done is their efficiency multiplied by that duration. Understanding these concepts helps in solving various work and time problems systematically.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 57archived

If a 3+ b 3= 405 and a + b = 9, then the value of ab is

  1. A
    10
  2. B
    15
  3. C
    12
  4. D
    8
Show answer
C. 12

Understanding the Problem: Finding the Value of ab The problem asks us to find the value of the product 'ab', given two equations involving 'a' and 'b': a sum of cubes equation and a simple sum equation. We are given: \(a^3 + b^3 = 405\) \(a + b = 9\) To solve this, we can use a relevant algebraic identity that connects the sum of cubes (\(a^3 + b^3\)) with the sum (\(a + b\)) and the product (ab). Algebraic Identity for Sum of Cubes A key algebraic identity is the formula for the sum of two cubes: \(a^3 + b^3 = (a + b)(a^2 - ab + b^2)\) Notice that this identity involves \(a + b\) and ab, but it also includes \(a^2 + b^2\). We need to express \(a^2 + b^2\) in terms of \(a + b\) and ab. Another useful identity is: \((a + b)^2 = a^2 + 2ab + b^2\) From this, we can rearrange to find \(a^2 + b^2\): \(a^2 + b^2 = (a + b)^2 - 2ab\) Now, substitute this expression for \(a^2 + b^2\) into the sum of cubes identity: \(a^3 + b^3 = (a + b)((a^2 + b^2) - ab)\) \(a^3 + b^3 = (a + b)(((a + b)^2 - 2ab) - ab)\) \(a^3 + b^3 = (a + b)((a + b)^2 - 3ab)\) This final form of the identity directly relates \(a^3 + b^3\) to \(a + b\) and ab. This is exactly what we need to solve the given problem. Step-by-Step Solution to Find the Value of ab We have the identity: \(a^3 + b^3 = (a + b)((a + b)^2 - 3ab)\) We are given: \(a^3 + b^3 = 405\) \(a + b = 9\) Let's substitute the given values into the identity: Start with the derived identity: \(a^3 + b^3 = (a + b)((a + b)^2 - 3ab)\) Substitute the given values for \(a^3 + b^3\) and \(a + b\): \(405 = (9)((9)^2 - 3ab)\) Simplify the expression inside the parentheses: \(405 = 9(81 - 3ab)\) Divide both sides of the equation by 9 to isolate the term in the parenthesis: \(\frac{405}{9} = 81 - 3ab\) Perform the division: \(45 = 81 - 3ab\) Rearrange the equation to solve for 3ab. Add 3ab to both sides and subtract 45 from both sides: \(3ab = 81 - 45\) Perform the subtraction: \(3ab = 36\) Finally, divide both sides by 3 to find the value of ab: \(ab = \frac{36}{3}\) Calculate the result: \(ab = 12\) Thus, the value of ab is 12. Verification Let's check if these values could potentially work (finding a and b is harder, but we can check the final product value). If ab = 12 and a + b = 9, we can see if it fits the original equation \(a^3 + b^3 = 405\). Using \(a+b=9\) and \(ab=12\), we have \(a^3 + b^3 = (a+b)((a+b)^2 - 3ab) = (9)((9)^2 - 3 \times 12)\). \(a^3 + b^3 = 9(81 - 36)\) \(a^3 + b^3 = 9(45)\) \(a^3 + b^3 = 405\) This matches the given information, confirming our calculated value for ab is correct. Summary of the Value Calculation for ab Using the given equations and applying the appropriate algebraic identity for the sum of cubes, we systematically solved for the unknown value ab. Given Information Identity Used Calculation Steps Result \(a^3 + b^3 = 405\) \(a^3 + b^3 = (a + b)((a + b)^2 - 3ab)\) Substitute values: \(405 = 9((9)^2 - 3ab)\) \(ab = 12\) \(a + b = 9\) Simplify: \(405 = 9(81 - 3ab)\) Solve for ab: \(45 = 81 - 3ab \implies 3ab = 36 \implies ab = 12\) Revision Table: Key Algebraic Identities Understanding basic algebraic identities is crucial for solving problems like this. Here are a few important ones: Identity Name Formula Square of a Sum \((x + y)^2 = x^2 + 2xy + y^2\) Square of a Difference \((x - y)^2 = x^2 - 2xy + y^2\) Difference of Squares \(x^2 - y^2 = (x - y)(x + y)\) Sum of Cubes \(x^3 + y^3 = (x + y)(x^2 - xy + y^2)\) Difference of Cubes \(x^3 - y^3 = (x - y)(x^2 + xy + y^2)\) Additional Information on Solving Algebraic Equations When solving algebraic problems involving multiple equations and variables, identifying the relationship between the given expressions and the required result is key. Often, this involves using algebraic identities or manipulating the equations to substitute or eliminate variables. In this case, recognizing the sum of cubes identity and expressing it in terms of sum and product was the crucial step. Always double-check your calculations, especially when rearranging equations or substituting values.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 58archived

In a circle with center O and radius 5 cm, AB and CD are two parallel chords of lengths 6 cm and x cm, respectively and the chords are on the opposite side of the center O. The distance between the chords is 7 cm. What is the value of x?

  1. A
    9
  2. B
    8
  3. C
    12
  4. D
    10
Show answer
B. 8

Understanding the Circle Geometry Problem The question describes a circle with a specific radius and two parallel chords located on opposite sides of the center. We are given the radius, the length of one chord, and the distance between the two parallel chords. Our goal is to find the length of the second chord. Applying Properties of Chords in a Circle In a circle, the perpendicular drawn from the center to a chord bisects the chord. This property is crucial for solving problems involving chord lengths and distances from the center. Let O be the center of the circle, and the radius be R = 5 cm. Let AB and CD be the two parallel chords. The length of chord AB is 6 cm. The length of chord CD is x cm. Since the chords are on opposite sides of the center O, the distance between the chords is the sum of the perpendicular distances from the center to each chord. Calculating Distance from Center to Chord AB Let M be the midpoint of chord AB. Then OM is perpendicular to AB. In right-angled triangle OMA, OA is the hypotenuse (radius), and AM is half the length of AB. Radius, OA = 5 cm Half length of AB, AM = AB / 2 = 6 cm / 2 = 3 cm Using the Pythagorean theorem in $\triangle$ OMA: $\text{OA}^2 = \text{OM}^2 + \text{AM}^2$ $5^2 = \text{OM}^2 + 3^2$ $25 = \text{OM}^2 + 9$ $\text{OM}^2 = 25 - 9 = 16$ $\text{OM} = \sqrt{16} = 4$ cm So, the distance from the center O to chord AB is 4 cm. Calculating Distance from Center to Chord CD The distance between the two parallel chords AB and CD is given as 7 cm. Since they are on opposite sides of the center, the distance between them is the sum of the distances of the chords from the center O. Distance between chords = OM + ON 7 cm = 4 cm + ON ON = 7 cm - 4 cm = 3 cm So, the distance from the center O to chord CD is 3 cm. Calculating the Length of Chord CD Let N be the midpoint of chord CD. Then ON is perpendicular to CD. In right-angled triangle ONC, OC is the hypotenuse (radius), and CN is half the length of CD. Radius, OC = 5 cm Distance from O to CD, ON = 3 cm Half length of CD, CN = CD / 2 = x / 2 cm Using the Pythagorean theorem in $\triangle$ ONC: $\text{OC}^2 = \text{ON}^2 + \text{CN}^2$ $5^2 = 3^2 + (\text{x}/2)^2$ $25 = 9 + (\text{x}/2)^2$ $(\text{x}/2)^2 = 25 - 9 = 16$ Taking the square root of both sides: $\text{x}/2 = \sqrt{16} = 4$ Now, solve for x: $\text{x} = 4 \times 2$ $\text{x} = 8$ cm The value of x, which is the length of chord CD, is 8 cm. Summary of Steps Identify the given information: radius, length of one chord, distance between parallel chords on opposite sides. Use the property that the perpendicular from the center bisects a chord. Use the Pythagorean theorem to find the distance from the center to the first chord. Use the total distance between the chords (sum of distances from center) to find the distance from the center to the second chord. Use the Pythagorean theorem again with the radius and the distance to the second chord to find half the length of the second chord. Double the half length to find the full length of the second chord. Parameter Value (cm) Radius (R) 5 Length of AB 6 Half Length of AB (AM) 3 Distance from O to AB (OM) 4 (Calculated) Distance between chords 7 Distance from O to CD (ON) 3 (Calculated) Half Length of CD (CN) 4 (Calculated) Length of CD (x) 8 (Calculated) The calculated value of x is 8 cm. Revision Table: Key Concepts for Circle Geometry Concept Description Relevance to Problem Radius Distance from the center to any point on the circle. Hypotenuse in right triangles formed with chords. Chord A line segment connecting two points on the circle. The lengths we are given and need to find. Perpendicular from Center A line segment from the center perpendicular to a chord. Bisects the chord; its length is the distance from the center to the chord. Pythagorean Theorem In a right triangle, $a^2 + b^2 = c^2$. Used to find unknown side lengths (distances or half-chords) in right triangles formed by the radius, half-chord, and distance from center. Parallel Chords Chords that do not intersect and maintain a constant distance. The distance between them is sum/difference of distances from center depending on whether they are on same/opposite sides. Additional Information: Parallel Chords on the Same Side If the two parallel chords were on the same side of the center, the distance between them would be the difference between their distances from the center. For instance, if chord AB was further from the center than chord CD, the distance between them would be OM - ON. The Pythagorean theorem steps would be similar for finding the individual distances OM and ON based on chord lengths and radius. Understanding whether chords are on the same or opposite sides is vital for setting up the equation involving the distance between them and their distances from the center.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 59archived

Study the following table and answer the question: Number of students enrolled for Vocational Courses (VC) in five institutes - A, B,C, D & E. Year Institute 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 A 120 135 130 135 128 140 B 125 132 138 132 135 142 C 125 120 125 138 140 135 D 100 125 122 140 128 138 E 105 110 115 147 130 145 The ratio of the total number of students enrolled for VC in institutes A, C and E in 2016 to the total number of students enrolled in institutes B and D in 2018, is

  1. A
    8 ∶ 7
  2. B
    3 ∶ 2
  3. C
    21 ∶ 19
  4. D
    14 ∶ 9
Show answer
B. 3 ∶ 2

Understanding Vocational Course Enrollment Data The question asks us to calculate the ratio of the total number of students enrolled in Vocational Courses (VC) in specific institutes and years based on the provided table data. We need to find two sums: The total number of students in institutes A, C, and E in the year 2016. The total number of students in institutes B and D in the year 2018. Let's first look at the data table provided: Year\Institute 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 A 120 135 130 135 128 140 B 125 132 138 132 135 142 C 125 120 125 138 140 135 D 100 125 122 140 128 138 E 105 110 115 147 130 145 Calculating Total Enrollment in 2016 for A, C, E We need to find the number of students enrolled in institutes A, C, and E specifically for the year 2016. Looking at the table: Students in Institute A in 2016 = 135 Students in Institute C in 2016 = 138 Students in Institute E in 2016 = 147 The total number of students enrolled for VC in institutes A, C, and E in 2016 is the sum of these values: \(\text{Total}_{2016, A+C+E} = 135 + 138 + 147\) \(\text{Total}_{2016, A+C+E} = 420\) Calculating Total Enrollment in 2018 for B and D Next, we need to find the number of students enrolled in institutes B and D specifically for the year 2018. Looking at the table: Students in Institute B in 2018 = 142 Students in Institute D in 2018 = 138 The total number of students enrolled for VC in institutes B and D in 2018 is the sum of these values: \(\text{Total}_{2018, B+D} = 142 + 138\) \(\text{Total}_{2018, B+D} = 280\) Finding the Ratio of Enrollments The question asks for the ratio of the total students in A, C, and E in 2016 to the total students in B and D in 2018. \(\text{Ratio} = \text{Total}_{2016, A+C+E} : \text{Total}_{2018, B+D}\) \(\text{Ratio} = 420 : 280\) To simplify the ratio, we find the greatest common divisor (GCD) of 420 and 280 or divide by common factors iteratively. Both numbers are divisible by 10: \(420 \div 10 = 42\) \(280 \div 10 = 28\) The ratio becomes 42 : 28. Both 42 and 28 are divisible by 14: \(42 \div 14 = 3\) \(28 \div 14 = 2\) The simplified ratio is 3 : 2. Final Ratio Result The ratio of the total number of students enrolled for VC in institutes A, C and E in 2016 to the total number of students enrolled in institutes B and D in 2018 is 3 : 2. Revision Table: Vocational Course Enrollment Analysis Calculation Step Institutes & Year Enrollment Data Total/Ratio Sum 1 (Numerator) A, C, E in 2016 135 (A) + 138 (C) + 147 (E) 420 Sum 2 (Denominator) B, D in 2018 142 (B) + 138 (D) 280 Ratio Calculation Sum 1 : Sum 2 420 : 280 Ratio Simplification Divide by 140 420/140 : 280/140 3 : 2 Additional Information: Ratios and Data Interpretation Understanding ratios is a key part of data interpretation questions. A ratio compares two quantities. It shows how many times one quantity contains another. Ratios can be simplified by dividing both parts by their greatest common divisor. Data Extraction: The first step in solving such problems is always to correctly extract the required data points from the table. Summation: Add the values corresponding to the specific criteria (institutes and years) mentioned in the question. Ratio Formation: Write the calculated sums as a ratio in the order specified by the question (first sum : second sum). Simplification: Always simplify the ratio to its lowest possible terms by dividing both numbers by their common factors until no more common factors exist other than 1. This makes the ratio easier to understand and compare. This type of question tests your ability to read data from tables, perform basic arithmetic operations (addition), and understand and simplify ratios.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 60archived

If \(\left(2x-\frac{3}{x}\right)=2\) , then what is the value of \(\left(16x^4+\frac{81}{x^4}\right)\) ?

  1. A
    220
  2. B
    180
  3. C
    184
  4. D
    328
Show answer
C. 184

Finding the Value of an Algebraic Expression The problem asks us to find the value of the expression \( \left(16x^4+\frac{81}{x^4}\right) \) given the equation \( \left(2x-\frac{3}{x}\right)=2 \). This type of problem requires squaring the given equation multiple times to reach the desired higher powers of \(x\). Step-by-Step Calculation of the Expression Value We are given the equation: \( 2x-\frac{3}{x}=2 \) To get terms with \(x^2\), we can square both sides of the equation. \( \left(2x-\frac{3}{x}\right)^2 = 2^2 \) Using the algebraic identity \( (a-b)^2 = a^2 - 2ab + b^2 \), where \(a = 2x\) and \(b = \frac{3}{x}\), we expand the left side: \( (2x)^2 - 2(2x)\left(\frac{3}{x}\right) + \left(\frac{3}{x}\right)^2 = 4 \) Simplify the terms: \( 4x^2 - 2 \times 2 \times 3 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 4 \) \( 4x^2 - 12 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 4 \) Now, isolate the terms involving \(x^2\) on one side: \( 4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 4 + 12 \) \( 4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 16 \) Now we have an expression involving \(x^2\) and \(1/x^2\). The expression we need to find is \( \left(16x^4+\frac{81}{x^4}\right) \), which involves \(x^4\) and \(1/x^4\). Notice that \( (4x^2)^2 = 16x^4 \) and \( \left(\frac{9}{x^2}\right)^2 = \frac{81}{x^4} \). So, we can square the equation \( 4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 16 \) to get the required terms. Square both sides of the equation \( 4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 16 \): \( \left(4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2}\right)^2 = 16^2 \) Using the algebraic identity \( (a+b)^2 = a^2 + 2ab + b^2 \), where \(a = 4x^2\) and \(b = \frac{9}{x^2}\), we expand the left side: \( (4x^2)^2 + 2(4x^2)\left(\frac{9}{x^2}\right) + \left(\frac{9}{x^2}\right)^2 = 256 \) Simplify the terms: \( 16x^4 + 2 \times 4 \times 9 + \frac{81}{x^4} = 256 \) \( 16x^4 + 72 + \frac{81}{x^4} = 256 \) Now, isolate the expression \( 16x^4 + \frac{81}{x^4} \) on one side: \( 16x^4 + \frac{81}{x^4} = 256 - 72 \) \( 16x^4 + \frac{81}{x^4} = 184 \) Thus, the value of \( \left(16x^4+\frac{81}{x^4}\right) \) is 184. Summary of Steps Start with the given equation \(2x - \frac{3}{x} = 2\). Square both sides to find the value of \(4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2}\). Square the resulting equation \(4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 16\) to find the value of \(16x^4 + \frac{81}{x^4}\). Perform the final subtraction to get the result. Step Equation/Expression Operation Result 1 \(2x - \frac{3}{x}\) Given value \(2\) 2 \(2x - \frac{3}{x}\) Square both sides \(4x^2 - 12 + \frac{9}{x^2} = 4\) 3 \(4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2}\) Isolate the terms \(16\) 4 \(4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2}\) Square both sides \(16x^4 + 72 + \frac{81}{x^4} = 256\) 5 \(16x^4 + \frac{81}{x^4}\) Isolate the expression \(256 - 72 = 184\) The final answer is 184. Revision Table: Algebraic Identities and Calculations Understanding basic algebraic identities is crucial for solving problems involving squaring expressions. The key identities used here are: \((a-b)^2 = a^2 - 2ab + b^2\) \((a+b)^2 = a^2 + 2ab + b^2\) In this problem, we applied these identities sequentially. First, \((2x - \frac{3}{x})^2\) uses the \((a-b)^2\) form. Then, \((4x^2 + \frac{9}{x^2})^2\) uses the \((a+b)^2\) form. The process involves identifying how the target expression relates to the given one through powers and then applying the appropriate squaring steps, being careful with the middle term \(2ab\). Additional Information: Solving Equations with Reciprocal Terms Equations and expressions involving a variable and its reciprocal (like \(x\) and \(\frac{1}{x}\)) often appear in algebraic problems. Squaring or cubing these expressions is a common technique to find the values of expressions with higher powers. For example, if you are given \(x + \frac{1}{x} = k\), you can find \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}\) by squaring both sides: \((x + \frac{1}{x})^2 = k^2 \implies x^2 + 2(x)(\frac{1}{x}) + \frac{1}{x^2} = k^2 \implies x^2 + 2 + \frac{1}{x^2} = k^2 \implies x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} = k^2 - 2\). Similarly, if you need \(x^4 + \frac{1}{x^4}\), you would square the expression for \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}\). Problems like the one solved above extend this concept to expressions with coefficients, such as \(ax + \frac{b}{x}\), where the middle term \(2ab\) calculation needs careful attention.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 61archived

In a circle with center O, AB is a diameter and CD is a chord such that ∠ABC = 34° and CD = BD. What is the measure of ∠DBC?

  1. A
    32°
  2. B
    30°
  3. C
    24°
  4. D
    28°
Show answer
D. 28°

Solving the Circle Geometry Problem: Finding ∠DBC This problem requires us to find the measure of a specific angle (∠DBC) within a circle, using given information about a diameter, a chord, and another angle. We will use fundamental properties of circles and triangles to solve this. Understanding the Given Information The circle has center O. AB is the diameter of the circle. CD is a chord of the circle. The angle ∠ABC = 34°. The length of chord CD is equal to the length of chord BD (CD = BD). Applying Circle Properties Since AB is the diameter, the angle subtended by the diameter at any point on the circumference is a right angle (90°). Therefore, in ▵ACB, ∠ACB = 90°. In ▵ACB, we know two angles: ∠ABC = 34° and ∠ACB = 90°. The sum of angles in a triangle is 180°. We can find ∠BAC: \begin{equation*} \angle \text{BAC} + \angle \text{ABC} + \angle \text{ACB} = 180^\circ \end{equation*} \begin{equation*} \angle \text{BAC} + 34^\circ + 90^\circ = 180^\circ \end{equation*} \begin{equation*} \angle \text{BAC} = 180^\circ - 124^\circ = 56^\circ \end{equation*} So, ∠BAC = 56°. Using the Chord Length Information We are given that CD = BD. In a circle, equal chords subtend equal angles at the circumference. Therefore, the angle subtended by chord CD at the circumference is equal to the angle subtended by chord BD at the circumference. Chord CD subtends angle ∠CAD and ∠CBD at the circumference. Chord BD subtends angle ∠BAD and ∠BCD at the circumference. Since CD = BD, we have: ∠CAD = ∠CBD ∠BAD = ∠BCD Let the angle we want to find, ∠DBC, be x. So, ∠CBD = x. Since ∠CAD = ∠CBD, we also have ∠CAD = x. Now consider the angle ∠BAC, which we found to be 56°. ∠BAC is the sum of ∠BAD and ∠CAD: \begin{equation*} \angle \text{BAC} = \angle \text{BAD} + \angle \text{CAD} \end{equation*} \begin{equation*} 56^\circ = \angle \text{BAD} + x \quad (*)\end{equation*} We also know that ∠BAD = ∠BCD because they are angles subtended by the equal chords BD and CD respectively. Consider ▵BCD. Since CD = BD, it is an isosceles triangle. In an isosceles triangle, the angles opposite the equal sides are equal. The angles opposite sides CD and BD are ∠CBD and ∠BCD respectively. Thus, ∠CBD = ∠BCD. Since we defined ∠CBD = x, we have ∠BCD = x. We previously established that ∠BAD = ∠BCD. Substituting ∠BCD = x, we get ∠BAD = x. Now substitute ∠BAD = x into equation (*): \begin{equation*} 56^\circ = x + x \end{equation*} \begin{equation*} 56^\circ = 2x \end{equation*} \begin{equation*} x = \frac{56^\circ}{2} \end{equation*} \begin{equation*} x = 28^\circ \end{equation*} Therefore, ∠DBC = 28°. Summary of Steps Identify that ∠ACB = 90° as it is the angle in a semicircle. Calculate ∠BAC in ▵ACB using the sum of angles in a triangle. Use the property that equal chords (CD = BD) subtend equal angles at the circumference (∠CAD = ∠CBD and ∠BAD = ∠BCD). Use the property that ▵BCD is isosceles (CD=BD), so ∠CBD = ∠BCD. Set ∠DBC = x. From the properties, deduce that ∠CAD = x and ∠BAD = ∠BCD = x. Use the relation ∠BAC = ∠BAD + ∠CAD to form an equation in terms of x. Solve the equation for x. Angle Reason Value ∠ABC Given 34° ∠ACB Angle in a semicircle 90° ∠BAC Sum of angles in ▵ACB 56° ∠CBD Let this be x (the angle we want to find) x ∠CAD Angles subtended by equal chords CD and BD x ∠BCD Angles subtended by equal chords BD and CD, also base angle of isosceles ▵BCD x ∠BAD Angles subtended by equal chords BD and CD x ∠BAC ∠BAD + ∠CAD ∠x + ∠x = 2x 2x Equating ∠BAC 56° x Solving for x 28° Thus, the measure of ∠DBC is 28°. Revision Table: Key Circle Geometry Concepts Concept Description Application in Problem Angle in a Semicircle The angle subtended by a diameter at any point on the circumference is 90°. Used to find ∠ACB = 90°. Angles Subtended by Same Chord Angles subtended by the same chord in the same segment of a circle are equal. Used implicitly when considering angles from chords CD and BD. Angles Subtended by Equal Chords Equal chords subtend equal angles at the circumference (and at the center). Used to deduce ∠CAD = ∠CBD and ∠BAD = ∠BCD because CD = BD. Sum of Angles in a Triangle The sum of the interior angles of a triangle is always 180°. Used to find ∠BAC in ▵ACB and to verify angles in ▵BCD. Isosceles Triangle Property In an isosceles triangle, the angles opposite the equal sides are equal. Used in ▵BCD (CD=BD) to show ∠CBD = ∠BCD. Additional Information: Properties of Chords and Angles in Circles Circles have many fascinating properties related to their chords, arcs, and angles. Understanding these is crucial for solving geometry problems. Chord: A line segment connecting two points on the circumference of a circle. Diameter: A chord passing through the center of the circle (the longest chord). Arc: A continuous part of the circumference of a circle. Central Angle: An angle formed by two radii with the vertex at the center. The measure of a central angle is equal to the measure of its intercepted arc. Inscribed Angle: An angle formed by two chords with the vertex on the circumference. The measure of an inscribed angle is half the measure of its intercepted arc (or half the corresponding central angle). Equal Arcs: Equal arcs subtend equal central angles and equal inscribed angles. Equal Chords: Equal chords cut off equal arcs. Equal chords are equidistant from the center. In this problem, the condition CD = BD directly relates to the arcs they cut off (arc CD = arc BD) and the angles they subtend. By combining this with the angle in a semicircle property and basic triangle properties, we were able to find the required angle ∠DBC.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 62archived

Table shows the number of trees planted in 4 cities from 2016 to 2020. Years Chandigarh Ahmadabad Pune Kolkata 2016 1800 2500 1800 2000 2017 2500 2300 1850 1800 2018 2300 2400 1840 1760 2019 2440 1950 1900 1600 2020 2250 2100 2000 1750 From 2016 to 2020, how many more trees were planted in Ahmedabad as compared to trees planted in Pune?

  1. A
    2000
  2. B
    1860
  3. C
    2340
  4. D
    1850
Show answer
B. 1860

Understanding the Tree Planting Data The question asks us to compare the total number of trees planted in Ahmedabad and Pune over a five-year period, from 2016 to 2020, based on the provided table. We need to find out how many more trees were planted in Ahmedabad compared to Pune during this time. First, let's examine the data presented in the table: Years Chandigarh Ahmadabad Pune Kolkata 2016 1800 2500 1800 2000 2017 2500 2300 1850 1800 2018 2300 2400 1840 1760 2019 2440 1950 1900 1600 2020 2250 2100 2000 1750 Calculating Total Trees in Ahmedabad To find the total number of trees planted in Ahmedabad from 2016 to 2020, we need to sum the numbers in the Ahmedabad column for each year: Trees planted in Ahmedabad in 2016 = 2500 Trees planted in Ahmedabad in 2017 = 2300 Trees planted in Ahmedabad in 2018 = 2400 Trees planted in Ahmedabad in 2019 = 1950 Trees planted in Ahmedabad in 2020 = 2100 Total trees in Ahmedabad (2016-2020) = $2500 + 2300 + 2400 + 1950 + 2100$ Total trees in Ahmedabad = $11250$ Calculating Total Trees in Pune Next, we calculate the total number of trees planted in Pune from 2016 to 2020 by summing the numbers in the Pune column for each year: Trees planted in Pune in 2016 = 1800 Trees planted in Pune in 2017 = 1850 Trees planted in Pune in 2018 = 1840 Trees planted in Pune in 2019 = 1900 Trees planted in Pune in 2020 = 2000 Total trees in Pune (2016-2020) = $1800 + 1850 + 1840 + 1900 + 2000$ Total trees in Pune = $9390$ Finding the Difference in Trees Planted The question asks how many more trees were planted in Ahmedabad compared to Pune. To find this difference, we subtract the total number of trees planted in Pune from the total number of trees planted in Ahmedabad: Difference = Total trees in Ahmedabad - Total trees in Pune Difference = $11250 - 9390$ Difference = $1860$ Therefore, 1860 more trees were planted in Ahmedabad as compared to trees planted in Pune from 2016 to 2020. Summary of Calculations Here's a quick look at the totals: City Total Trees Planted (2016-2020) Ahmedabad 11250 Pune 9390 Difference = $11250 - 9390 = 1860$ Revision Table - Tree Data Analysis Review the key figures and calculations: Metric Value Total Trees Ahmedabad (2016-2020) 11250 Total Trees Pune (2016-2020) 9390 Difference (Ahmedabad - Pune) 1860 Additional Information - Data Interpretation Tips Data interpretation questions require careful reading and calculation. Here are some tips: Read the Question Carefully: Understand exactly what is being asked (e.g., total, average, difference, ratio, percentage change). Identify Relevant Data: Locate the specific numbers or categories needed from the table or chart. Perform Calculations Systematically: Break down complex calculations into smaller steps. Double-Check Calculations: Errors in addition or subtraction are common. Reread the question and verify your steps. Pay Attention to Units and Time Periods: Ensure you are comparing data over the correct timeframe and using consistent units.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 63archived

The average of 22 numbers is 37.5. The average of first 12 numbers is 40.6 and that of the last 12 numbers is 35.4. If 11th and 12 th numbers are excluded, then what is the average of the remaining numbers?

  1. A
    37.8
  2. B
    37.4
  3. C
    36.4
  4. D
    36.9
Show answer
D. 36.9

Finding the Average of Remaining Numbers This question asks us to find the average of a set of numbers after removing two specific numbers. We are given the average of the initial set, the average of the first few numbers, and the average of the last few numbers, with some overlap. We can solve this by first finding the total sum of the numbers in each given group. Calculating Total Sums We are given the following information about the averages: The average of 22 numbers is 37.5. The average of the first 12 numbers is 40.6. The average of the last 12 numbers is 35.4. The total sum of a set of numbers is calculated by multiplying the average by the count of numbers. Using this formula, we can find the sum of numbers in each group: Total sum of all 22 numbers: $\text{Sum}_{22} = \text{Average} \times \text{Count} = 37.5 \times 22$ Let's calculate the sum of all 22 numbers: Calculation: $37.5 \times 22$ Result: 825 So, the total sum of the 22 numbers is 825. Total sum of the first 12 numbers: $\text{Sum}_{\text{first } 12} = \text{Average} \times \text{Count} = 40.6 \times 12$ Let's calculate the sum of the first 12 numbers: Calculation: $40.6 \times 12$ Result: 487.2 The sum of the first 12 numbers is 487.2. Total sum of the last 12 numbers: $\text{Sum}_{\text{last } 12} = \text{Average} \times \text{Count} = 35.4 \times 12$ Let's calculate the sum of the last 12 numbers: Calculation: $35.4 \times 12$ Result: 424.8 The sum of the last 12 numbers is 424.8. Finding the Sum of Overlapping Numbers The set of the first 12 numbers includes numbers 1 to 12. The set of the last 12 numbers includes numbers 11 to 22. The numbers 11 and 12 are present in both sets. If we add the sum of the first 12 numbers and the sum of the last 12 numbers, we are adding the 11th and 12th numbers twice. This sum is equal to the sum of all 22 numbers plus the sum of the 11th and 12th numbers. Mathematically, this can be written as: $\text{Sum}_{\text{first } 12} + \text{Sum}_{\text{last } 12} = \text{Sum}_{22} + (\text{11th number} + \text{12th number})$ We can use this relationship to find the sum of the 11th and 12th numbers: $(\text{11th number} + \text{12th number}) = (\text{Sum}_{\text{first } 12} + \text{Sum}_{\text{last } 12}) - \text{Sum}_{22}$ Let's substitute the calculated values: Calculation: $(487.2 + 424.8) - 825$ Step 1: $912 - 825$ Result: 87 The sum of the 11th and 12th numbers is 87. Calculating the Sum of Remaining Numbers We need to find the average of the remaining numbers after excluding the 11th and 12th numbers. There were initially 22 numbers. After excluding 2 numbers (the 11th and 12th), there are $22 - 2 = 20$ numbers remaining. The sum of these remaining 20 numbers is the total sum of the 22 numbers minus the sum of the two numbers that were excluded. $\text{Sum}_{\text{remaining } 20} = \text{Sum}_{22} - (\text{11th number} + \text{12th number})$ Let's substitute the calculated values: Calculation: $825 - 87$ Result: 738 The sum of the remaining 20 numbers is 738. Finding the Average of Remaining Numbers Finally, to find the average of the remaining 20 numbers, we divide their sum by the count (which is 20). $\text{Average}_{\text{remaining } 20} = \frac{\text{Sum}_{\text{remaining } 20}}{\text{Count of remaining numbers}}$ $\text{Average}_{\text{remaining } 20} = \frac{738}{20}$ Let's calculate the average: Calculation: $\frac{738}{20}$ Result: 36.9 The average of the remaining 20 numbers is 36.9. Revision Table: Key Calculations Description Calculation Result Sum of 22 numbers $37.5 \times 22$ 825 Sum of first 12 numbers $40.6 \times 12$ 487.2 Sum of last 12 numbers $35.4 \times 12$ 424.8 Sum of 11th and 12th numbers $(487.2 + 424.8) - 825$ 87 Sum of remaining 20 numbers $825 - 87$ 738 Average of remaining 20 numbers $\frac{738}{20}$ 36.9 Additional Information on Averages The average, or arithmetic mean, is a fundamental concept in statistics. It represents a central value of a set of numbers. Definition: The average of a set of numbers is the sum of the numbers divided by the count of the numbers. $\text{Average} = \frac{\text{Sum of numbers}}{\text{Count of numbers}}$ Using Averages to Find Sums: If you know the average and the count, you can find the sum using the formula: $\text{Sum} = \text{Average} \times \text{Count}$. This is what we used in the problem. Handling Overlapping Sets: When dealing with averages of overlapping sets, like in this problem, the sum of the individual set sums will double-count the overlapping elements. This property is key to isolating the sum of the overlapping elements. Applications: Averages are used widely in various fields, including academics (calculating grades), finance (average returns), economics (average income), and science. Effect of Removing Elements: Removing elements from a set changes both the sum and the count, which in turn changes the average of the remaining set. If the removed elements are greater than the original average, the new average will decrease. If they are less than the original average, the new average will increase. In this problem, the sum of the removed numbers (87) is higher than the average of two numbers equal to the original average ($2 \times 37.5 = 75$), so removing them causes the average of the remaining numbers to slightly decrease (from 37.5 to 36.9).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 64archived

If \(\frac{cosec \theta+\cot \theta}{cosec \theta-\cot \theta}=7\) , then the value of \(\frac{4\sin^2\theta-1}{4\sin^2\theta+5}\) is:

  1. A
    \(-\frac{1}{3}\)
  2. B
    \(\frac{1}{9}\)
  3. C
    \(-\frac{1}{9}\)
  4. D
    \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Show answer
B. \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Trigonometry Problem: Evaluating an Expression This problem involves simplifying a trigonometric equation and then using the result to evaluate another trigonometric expression. We are given an equation relating cosecant and cotangent, and we need to find the value of an expression involving the square of the sine function. Solving the Given Trigonometric Equation The initial equation provided is: \[ \frac{\cosec \theta+\cot \theta}{\cosec \theta-\cot \theta}=7 \] We know the basic trigonometric identities: \(\cosec \theta = \frac{1}{\sin \theta}\) \(\cot \theta = \frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}\) Substitute these identities into the given equation: \[ \frac{\frac{1}{\sin \theta}+\frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}}{\frac{1}{\sin \theta}-\frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}}=7 \] Combine the terms in the numerator and the denominator: \[ \frac{\frac{1+\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}}{\frac{1-\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}}=7 \] Since the denominator in both the main numerator and main denominator is \(\sin \theta\), we can cancel it out (assuming \(\sin \theta \neq 0\)): \[ \frac{1+\cos \theta}{1-\cos \theta}=7 \] Now, we can solve for \(\cos \theta\). Multiply both sides by \((1-\cos \theta)\): \[ 1+\cos \theta = 7(1-\cos \theta) \] \[ 1+\cos \theta = 7 - 7\cos \theta \] Gather the \(\cos \theta\) terms on one side and the constants on the other: \[ \cos \theta + 7\cos \theta = 7 - 1 \] \[ 8\cos \theta = 6 \] Divide by 8 to find the value of \(\cos \theta\): \[ \cos \theta = \frac{6}{8} = \frac{3}{4} \] Finding the Value of \(\sin^2 \theta\) We need to find the value of an expression involving \(\sin^2 \theta\). We can use the fundamental trigonometric identity: \[ \sin^2 \theta + \cos^2 \theta = 1 \] Rearrange the identity to solve for \(\sin^2 \theta\): \[ \sin^2 \theta = 1 - \cos^2 \theta \] Substitute the value of \(\cos \theta = \frac{3}{4}\) that we found: \[ \sin^2 \theta = 1 - \left(\frac{3}{4}\right)^2 \] \[ \sin^2 \theta = 1 - \frac{9}{16} \] Calculate the difference: \[ \sin^2 \theta = \frac{16}{16} - \frac{9}{16} = \frac{16-9}{16} = \frac{7}{16} \] So, the value of \(\sin^2 \theta\) is \(\frac{7}{16}\). Evaluating the Target Expression The expression we need to evaluate is: \[ \frac{4\sin^2\theta-1}{4\sin^2\theta+5} \] Substitute the value of \(\sin^2 \theta = \frac{7}{16}\) into this expression: \[ \frac{4\left(\frac{7}{16}\right)-1}{4\left(\frac{7}{16}\right)+5} \] Simplify the terms in the numerator and the denominator: \[ \frac{\frac{4 \times 7}{16}-1}{\frac{4 \times 7}{16}+5} = \frac{\frac{28}{16}-1}{\frac{28}{16}+5} \] Reduce the fraction \(\frac{28}{16}\) by dividing both numerator and denominator by 4: \[ \frac{\frac{7}{4}-1}{\frac{7}{4}+5} \] Now, perform the subtraction in the numerator and the addition in the denominator: Numerator: \(\frac{7}{4}-1 = \frac{7}{4}-\frac{4}{4} = \frac{7-4}{4} = \frac{3}{4}\) Denominator: \(\frac{7}{4}+5 = \frac{7}{4}+\frac{20}{4} = \frac{7+20}{4} = \frac{27}{4}\) Substitute these simplified values back into the main expression: \[ \frac{\frac{3}{4}}{\frac{27}{4}} \] To divide fractions, we multiply the numerator by the reciprocal of the denominator: \[ \frac{3}{4} \times \frac{4}{27} \] Cancel out the 4 in the numerator and denominator: \[ \frac{3}{27} \] Reduce the fraction by dividing both numerator and denominator by 3: \[ \frac{1}{9} \] The value of the expression \(\frac{4\sin^2\theta-1}{4\sin^2\theta+5}\) is \(\frac{1}{9}\). Step-by-Step Solution Start with the given equation \(\frac{\cosec \theta+\cot \theta}{\cosec \theta-\cot \theta}=7\). Rewrite cosecant and cotangent in terms of sine and cosine: \(\frac{\frac{1}{\sin \theta}+\frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}}{\frac{1}{\sin \theta}-\frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}}=7\). Simplify the fractions: \(\frac{1+\cos \theta}{1-\cos \theta}=7\). Solve for \(\cos \theta\): \(1+\cos \theta = 7(1-\cos \theta) \Rightarrow 1+\cos \theta = 7-7\cos \theta \Rightarrow 8\cos \theta = 6 \Rightarrow \cos \theta = \frac{3}{4}\). Calculate \(\sin^2 \theta\) using the identity \(\sin^2 \theta = 1 - \cos^2 \theta\): \(\sin^2 \theta = 1 - \left(\frac{3}{4}\right)^2 = 1 - \frac{9}{16} = \frac{7}{16}\). Substitute \(\sin^2 \theta = \frac{7}{16}\) into the target expression \(\frac{4\sin^2\theta-1}{4\sin^2\theta+5}\). Evaluate the expression: \(\frac{4(\frac{7}{16})-1}{4(\frac{7}{16})+5} = \frac{\frac{7}{4}-1}{\frac{7}{4}+5} = \frac{\frac{3}{4}}{\frac{27}{4}} = \frac{3}{4} \times \frac{4}{27} = \frac{3}{27} = \frac{1}{9}\). Revision Table: Trigonometry Identities Identity Type Identity Reciprocal Identity \(\cosec \theta = \frac{1}{\sin \theta}\) Quotient Identity \(\cot \theta = \frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}\) Pythagorean Identity \(\sin^2 \theta + \cos^2 \theta = 1\) Additional Information: Solving Trigonometric Equations Solving trigonometric equations often involves using identities to simplify the equation into a form that can be solved for a specific trigonometric function (like \(\sin \theta\), \(\cos \theta\), or \(\tan \theta\)). Once the value of one function is known, other functions or expressions can be found using identities. In this problem, we used reciprocal, quotient, and Pythagorean identities. The technique of multiplying the numerator and denominator by the conjugate is also common in simplifying expressions involving \(\cosec \theta \pm \cot \theta\), but direct substitution with sine and cosine identities worked effectively here.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 65archived

x + y + z = 2 and xy + yz + zx = -11, then the value of x 3+ y 3+ z 3- 3xyz is:

  1. A
    71
  2. B
    74
  3. C
    69
  4. D
    78
Show answer
B. 74

Solving Algebraic Expression Problems This problem requires us to find the value of a specific algebraic expression, $x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz$, given the values of $x+y+z$ and $xy+yz+zx$. We will use standard algebraic identities to solve this. Understanding the Algebraic Identity The expression $x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz$ can be factored using a well-known algebraic identity. The identity is: $\qquad x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = (x+y+z)(x^2+y^2+z^2 - xy - yz - zx)$ Notice that the term $(x^2+y^2+z^2 - xy - yz - zx)$ can be rewritten slightly as $(x^2+y^2+z^2 - (xy + yz + zx))$. So, the identity becomes: $\qquad x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = (x+y+z)(x^2+y^2+z^2 - (xy+yz+zx))$ We are given the values for $(x+y+z)$ and $(xy+yz+zx)$. However, we need the value of $(x^2+y^2+z^2)$ to use this identity directly. Calculating the Sum of Squares ($x^2+y^2+z^2$) We can find the value of $(x^2+y^2+z^2)$ using another common algebraic identity relating the sum of variables and the sum of their products taken two at a time: $\qquad (x+y+z)^2 = x^2+y^2+z^2 + 2(xy+yz+zx)$ We can rearrange this identity to solve for $(x^2+y^2+z^2)$: $\qquad x^2+y^2+z^2 = (x+y+z)^2 - 2(xy+yz+zx)$ Step-by-Step Solution for the Value of $\mathbf{x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz}$ Given values: $x+y+z = 2$ $xy+yz+zx = -11$ Step 1: Calculate $\mathbf{x^2+y^2+z^2}$. Using the identity $x^2+y^2+z^2 = (x+y+z)^2 - 2(xy+yz+zx)$, substitute the given values: $\qquad x^2+y^2+z^2 = (2)^2 - 2(-11)$ $\qquad x^2+y^2+z^2 = 4 - (-22)$ $\qquad x^2+y^2+z^2 = 4 + 22$ $\qquad x^2+y^2+z^2 = 26$ Step 2: Calculate $\mathbf{x^3+y^3+z^3 - 3xyz}$. Now use the main identity $x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = (x+y+z)(x^2+y^2+z^2 - (xy+yz+zx))$. Substitute the given values and the calculated value of $x^2+y^2+z^2$: $\qquad x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = (2)(26 - (-11))$ $\qquad x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = (2)(26 + 11)$ $\qquad x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = (2)(37)$ $\qquad x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = 74$ Thus, the value of $x^3+y^3+z^3-3xyz$ is 74. Revision Table: Key Algebraic Formulas Formula Description $(a+b+c)^2 = a^2+b^2+c^2 + 2(ab+bc+ca)$ Square of the sum of three terms $a^3+b^3+c^3-3abc = (a+b+c)(a^2+b^2+c^2 - ab - bc - ca)$ Factorization of the sum/difference of cubes with a product term If $a+b+c=0$, then $a^3+b^3+c^3=3abc$ Special case of the cubic identity Additional Information on Algebraic Identities Algebraic identities are equations that are true for all possible values of the variables involved. They are powerful tools used to simplify expressions, factor polynomials, and solve equations. The identity for $x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz$ is particularly useful when dealing with symmetric expressions involving three variables. A key point related to the identity $x^3 + y^3 + z^3 - 3xyz = (x+y+z)(x^2+y^2+z^2 - xy - yz - zx)$ is its special case: If $x+y+z = 0$, then the right side of the identity becomes $0 \times (x^2+y^2+z^2 - xy - yz - zx) = 0$. This implies that if the sum of three numbers is zero, the sum of their cubes is equal to three times their product, i.e., $x^3 + y^3 + z^3 = 3xyz$. This special case is frequently tested in problems. The term $x^2+y^2+z^2 - xy - yz - zx$ can also be written as $\frac{1}{2}((x-y)^2 + (y-z)^2 + (z-x)^2)$. Since squares of real numbers are non-negative, this term is non-negative if $x, y, z$ are real. This can be useful in proving inequalities or determining conditions for equality.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 66archived

1 + 2 tan 2 θ + 2 sin θ sec 2 θ, 0° < θ < 90°, is equal to

  1. A
    \(\frac{1-\sin\theta}{1+\sin\theta}\)
  2. B
    \(\frac{1+\cos\theta}{1-\cos\theta}\)
  3. C
    \(\frac{1+\sin\theta}{1-\sin\theta}\)
  4. D
    \(\frac{1-\cos\theta}{1+\cos\theta}\)
Show answer
C. \(\frac{1+\sin\theta}{1-\sin\theta}\)

Simplifying Trigonometric Expressions Let's simplify the given trigonometric expression step by step. The expression is: \(1 + 2 \tan^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta \sec^2 \theta\), where \(0^\circ < \theta < 90^\circ\). To simplify, we can express \(\tan \theta\) and \(\sec \theta\) in terms of \(\sin \theta\) and \(\cos \theta\) using the fundamental trigonometric identities: \(\tan \theta = \frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}\) \(\sec \theta = \frac{1}{\cos \theta}\) Squaring these identities, we get: \(\tan^2 \theta = \frac{\sin^2 \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\) \(\sec^2 \theta = \frac{1}{\cos^2 \theta}\) Now, substitute these into the original expression: \(1 + 2 \left(\frac{\sin^2 \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\right) + 2 \sin \theta \left(\frac{1}{\cos^2 \theta}\right)\) \(1 + \frac{2 \sin^2 \theta}{\cos^2 \theta} + \frac{2 \sin \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\) To combine these terms, find a common denominator, which is \(\cos^2 \theta\): \(\frac{\cos^2 \theta}{\cos^2 \theta} + \frac{2 \sin^2 \theta}{\cos^2 \theta} + \frac{2 \sin \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\) Combine the numerators: \(\frac{\cos^2 \theta + 2 \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\) We know the identity \(\sin^2 \theta + \cos^2 \theta = 1\), which means \(\cos^2 \theta = 1 - \sin^2 \theta\). Substitute this into both the numerator and the denominator: Numerator: \(\cos^2 \theta + 2 \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta = (1 - \sin^2 \theta) + 2 \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta\) Simplify the numerator: \(1 - \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta = 1 + \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta\) This numerator looks like a perfect square: \(1 + 2 \sin \theta + \sin^2 \theta = (1 + \sin \theta)^2\). Denominator: \(\cos^2 \theta = 1 - \sin^2 \theta\). This is a difference of squares, which can be factored as \((1 - \sin \theta)(1 + \sin \theta)\). So the expression becomes: \(\frac{(1 + \sin \theta)^2}{(1 - \sin \theta)(1 + \sin \theta)}\) Given that \(0^\circ < \theta < 90^\circ\), the value of \(\sin \theta\) is between 0 and 1 (exclusive of 1 for 90 degrees but the range is strictly less than 90). This means \(1 + \sin \theta\) is never zero, so we can cancel one factor of \((1 + \sin \theta)\) from the numerator and the denominator. \(\frac{1 + \sin \theta}{1 - \sin \theta}\) This simplified form matches one of the given options. Let's compare it with the options: Option Expression Matches Simplified Form? 1 \(\frac{1-\sin\theta}{1+\sin\theta}\) No 2 \(\frac{1+\cos\theta}{1-\cos\theta}\) No (in terms of cos) 3 \(\frac{1+\sin\theta}{1-\sin\theta}\) Yes 4 \(\frac{1-\cos\theta}{1+\cos\theta}\) No (in terms of cos) The simplified expression is equal to \(\frac{1+\sin\theta}{1-\sin\theta}\). Detailed Steps for Trigonometric Simplification Here is a summary of the steps taken to simplify the expression \(1 + 2 \tan^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta \sec^2 \theta\): Start with the given expression: \(1 + 2 \tan^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta \sec^2 \theta\). Rewrite \(\tan^2 \theta\) as \(\frac{\sin^2 \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\) and \(\sec^2 \theta\) as \(\frac{1}{\cos^2 \theta}\). Substitute these into the expression: \(1 + 2 \left(\frac{\sin^2 \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\right) + 2 \sin \theta \left(\frac{1}{\cos^2 \theta}\right)\). Find a common denominator (\(\cos^2 \theta\)) and combine the terms: \(\frac{\cos^2 \theta + 2 \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta}{\cos^2 \theta}\). Use the identity \(\cos^2 \theta = 1 - \sin^2 \theta\) in the numerator and denominator: \(\frac{(1 - \sin^2 \theta) + 2 \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta}{1 - \sin^2 \theta}\). Simplify the numerator: \(1 + \sin^2 \theta + 2 \sin \theta\). Factor the numerator as a perfect square: \((1 + \sin \theta)^2\). Factor the denominator as a difference of squares: \((1 - \sin \theta)(1 + \sin \theta)\). Rewrite the expression: \(\frac{(1 + \sin \theta)^2}{(1 - \sin \theta)(1 + \sin \theta)}\). Cancel the common factor \((1 + \sin \theta)\), valid because \(0^\circ < \theta < 90^\circ\) implies \(\sin \theta \ne -1\). The simplified expression is \(\frac{1 + \sin \theta}{1 - \sin \theta}\). Compare the result with the given options to find the match. Understanding the Domain The condition \(0^\circ < \theta < 90^\circ\) is important for a few reasons: In this range, \(\cos \theta \ne 0\), so \(\tan \theta\) and \(\sec \theta\) are well-defined. \(\sin \theta\) is between 0 and 1 (\(0 < \sin \theta < 1\)). This ensures that the denominator \(1 - \sin \theta\) is not zero (since \(\sin \theta < 1\)) and the factor \(1 + \sin \theta\) is not zero (since \(\sin \theta \ge 0\)). This validates the cancellation step. Revision Table: Key Trigonometric Identities Mastering trigonometric identities is crucial for simplifying expressions. Here are some identities used or related to this problem: Identity Type Identity Pythagorean Identity \(\sin^2 \theta + \cos^2 \theta = 1\) Derived Pythagorean Identity \(1 + \tan^2 \theta = \sec^2 \theta\) Reciprocal Identity \(\sec \theta = \frac{1}{\cos \theta}\) Quotient Identity \(\tan \theta = \frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}\) Additional Information: Algebraic Simplification Patterns Beyond trigonometric identities, recognizing common algebraic patterns is key to simplifying expressions. Perfect Square Trinomial: Expressions of the form \(a^2 + 2ab + b^2\) can be factored as \((a+b)^2\), and \(a^2 - 2ab + b^2\) as \((a-b)^2\). In our problem, the numerator \(1 + 2 \sin \theta + \sin^2 \theta\) is a perfect square with \(a=1\) and \(b=\sin \theta\), factoring to \((1 + \sin \theta)^2\). Difference of Squares: Expressions of the form \(a^2 - b^2\) can be factored as \((a-b)(a+b)\). In our problem, the denominator \(1 - \sin^2 \theta\) is a difference of squares with \(a=1\) and \(b=\sin \theta\), factoring to \((1 - \sin \theta)(1 + \sin \theta)\). Combining trigonometric substitutions with algebraic factoring techniques is a common strategy in solving such problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 67archived

The income of A is 30% less than the income of B and the income of B is 137.5% more than that of C. If the income of A is Rs. 28500 less than that of B, then the income (in Rs.) of C is:

  1. A
    40000
  2. B
    50000
  3. C
    36000
  4. D
    48000
Show answer
A. 40000

This problem involves calculating the income of three individuals, A, B, and C, based on given percentage relationships and a specific difference in income between two of them. We need to use the provided information to find the income of C. Analyzing the Income Relationships Let's break down the given information about the incomes of A, B, and C: The income of A is 30% less than the income of B. The income of B is 137.5% more than that of C. The income of A is Rs. 28500 less than that of B. Translating Percentages to Equations We can represent these relationships using mathematical equations. Let the incomes of A, B, and C be \(I_A\), \(I_B\), and \(I_C\) respectively. Income of A is 30% less than B: \(I_A = I_B - 30\% \text{ of } I_B\) \(I_A = I_B - 0.30 \times I_B\) \(I_A = (1 - 0.30) \times I_B\) \(I_A = 0.70 \times I_B\) Income of B is 137.5% more than C: \(I_B = I_C + 137.5\% \text{ of } I_C\) \(I_B = I_C + 1.375 \times I_C\) \(I_B = (1 + 1.375) \times I_C\) \(I_B = 2.375 \times I_C\) Income of A is Rs. 28500 less than B: \(I_B - I_A = 28500\) Solving for Income B using the Difference We know that \(I_B - I_A = 28500\) and \(I_A = 0.70 \times I_B\). We can substitute the expression for \(I_A\) into the difference equation: \[I_B - (0.70 \times I_B) = 28500\] \[(1 - 0.70) \times I_B = 28500\] \[0.30 \times I_B = 28500\] Now, we can solve for \(I_B\): \[I_B = \frac{28500}{0.30}\] \[I_B = \frac{285000}{3}\] \[I_B = 95000\] So, the income of B is Rs. 95000. Calculating Income C from Income B We have the relationship \(I_B = 2.375 \times I_C\) and we now know \(I_B = 95000\). We can substitute the value of \(I_B\) into this equation: \[95000 = 2.375 \times I_C\] To find \(I_C\), we need to divide 95000 by 2.375: \[I_C = \frac{95000}{2.375}\] Let's convert 2.375 to a fraction to make the division easier. \(2.375 = 2 + 0.375\) \(0.375 = \frac{375}{1000} = \frac{3 \times 125}{8 \times 125} = \frac{3}{8}\) So, \(2.375 = 2 + \frac{3}{8} = \frac{16+3}{8} = \frac{19}{8}\). Now substitute the fraction into the equation for \(I_C\): \[I_C = \frac{95000}{\frac{19}{8}}\] \[I_C = 95000 \times \frac{8}{19}\] \[I_C = \frac{95000}{19} \times 8\] Since \(95 \div 19 = 5\), it follows that \(95000 \div 19 = 5000\). \[I_C = 5000 \times 8\] \[I_C = 40000\] Therefore, the income of C is Rs. 40000. Verification of Income Values Let's check if these income values satisfy all the conditions: \(I_C = 40000\) \(I_B = 2.375 \times I_C = 2.375 \times 40000 = 95000\) \(I_A = 0.70 \times I_B = 0.70 \times 95000 = 66500\) Check the difference between B and A: \[I_B - I_A = 95000 - 66500 = 28500\] This matches the given condition that the income of A is Rs. 28500 less than B. The calculated income for C is Rs. 40000. Individual Income (Rs.) C 40000 B 95000 A 66500 Revision Table: Income Calculations Here's a summary of the key values and calculations: Relationship Equation Calculation Result A in terms of B \(I_A = 0.70 \times I_B\) Derived from "30% less than B" \(I_A\) is 70% of \(I_B\) B in terms of C \(I_B = 2.375 \times I_C\) Derived from "137.5% more than C" \(I_B\) is 237.5% of \(I_C\) Difference B & A \(I_B - I_A = 28500\) Given information \(I_B - I_A = 28500\) Solve for \(I_B\) \(0.30 \times I_B = 28500\) Substituting \(I_A\) \(I_B = 95000\) Solve for \(I_C\) \(I_C = I_B / 2.375\) Using \(I_B\) and relationship \(I_C = 40000\) Additional Information: Percentage Increase and Decrease Understanding how percentage increase and decrease work is crucial for solving such problems. Let's define these concepts: Percentage Decrease: If a value \(X\) is decreased by \(p\%\), the new value is \(X - (p/100) \times X = X(1 - p/100)\). In our problem, A's income is 30% less than B, so \(I_A = I_B(1 - 30/100) = I_B(1 - 0.30) = 0.70 I_B\). Percentage Increase: If a value \(X\) is increased by \(p\%\), the new value is \(X + (p/100) \times X = X(1 + p/100)\). In our problem, B's income is 137.5% more than C, so \(I_B = I_C(1 + 137.5/100) = I_C(1 + 1.375) = 2.375 I_C\). Note that a percentage increase of more than 100% means the new value is more than double the original value. A 100% increase doubles the value (original + original = 2x original). A 137.5% increase means the new value is the original value plus 137.5% of the original value, resulting in 237.5% of the original value. These concepts are fundamental in solving problems involving percentages, ratios, and proportional relationships often found in quantitative aptitude sections of exams.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 68archived

The selling price of an article marked for Rs. 10000 after giving three discounts, 20%, 10% and k% is Rs. 6120. What will be selling price (in Rs.) of the same article if a single discount of (k + 20)% is allowed?

  1. A
    6500
  2. B
    8000
  3. C
    8500
  4. D
    6800
Show answer
A. 6500

Solving the Discount Problem: Step-by-Step This problem involves calculating the selling price of an article after applying multiple successive discounts and then finding the selling price under a single combined discount. We are given the marked price, the final selling price after three discounts (two known percentages and one unknown 'k' percent), and we need to find 'k' first. Once 'k' is found, we will calculate the selling price with a single discount of (k + 20)%. Understanding Successive Discounts When successive discounts are applied, each subsequent discount is calculated on the price remaining after the previous discount. If the marked price is MP and discounts are \(d_1\%\), \(d_2\%\), and \(d_3\%\), the final selling price (SP) is given by: \[ \text{SP} = \text{MP} \times \left(1 - \frac{d_1}{100}\right) \times \left(1 - \frac{d_2}{100}\right) \times \left(1 - \frac{d_3}{100}\right) \] Calculating the Unknown Discount 'k' Given: Marked Price (MP) = Rs. 10000 First discount = 20% Second discount = 10% Third discount = k% Final Selling Price (SP1) = Rs. 6120 Using the formula for successive discounts, we can set up the equation: \[ 6120 = 10000 \times \left(1 - \frac{20}{100}\right) \times \left(1 - \frac{10}{100}\right) \times \left(1 - \frac{k}{100}\right) \] Let's simplify the terms: \[ 1 - \frac{20}{100} = 1 - 0.20 = 0.80 \] \[ 1 - \frac{10}{100} = 1 - 0.10 = 0.90 \] Substitute these values back into the equation: \[ 6120 = 10000 \times (0.80) \times (0.90) \times \left(1 - \frac{k}{100}\right) \] \[ 6120 = 10000 \times (0.72) \times \left(1 - \frac{k}{100}\right) \] \[ 6120 = 7200 \times \left(1 - \frac{k}{100}\right) \] Now, isolate the term containing 'k': \[ 1 - \frac{k}{100} = \frac{6120}{7200} \] Simplify the fraction \(\frac{6120}{7200}\): \[ \frac{6120}{7200} = \frac{612}{720} = \frac{306}{360} = \frac{153}{180} = \frac{51}{60} = \frac{17}{20} \] So, the equation becomes: \[ 1 - \frac{k}{100} = \frac{17}{20} \] Now, solve for \(\frac{k}{100}\): \[ \frac{k}{100} = 1 - \frac{17}{20} = \frac{20 - 17}{20} = \frac{3}{20} \] Finally, solve for 'k': \[ k = \frac{3}{20} \times 100 = 3 \times 5 = 15 \] So, the value of k is 15%. Calculating Selling Price with a Single Discount of (k + 20)% We found that k = 15%. The new single discount is (k + 20)%. Single Discount = (15 + 20)% = 35%. We need to find the selling price (SP2) of the same article with a single discount of 35% on the marked price of Rs. 10000. The selling price with a single discount is given by: \[ \text{SP} = \text{MP} \times \left(1 - \frac{\text{Discount \%}}{100}\right) \] Substitute the values: \[ \text{SP2} = 10000 \times \left(1 - \frac{35}{100}\right) \] \[ \text{SP2} = 10000 \times (1 - 0.35) \] \[ \text{SP2} = 10000 \times (0.65) \] \[ \text{SP2} = 6500 \] Therefore, the selling price of the same article if a single discount of (k + 20)% is allowed is Rs. 6500. Summary of Calculations Step Description Calculation Result 1 Price after 20% discount \(10000 \times (1 - 0.20)\) Rs. 8000 2 Price after 10% discount (on Rs. 8000) \(8000 \times (1 - 0.10)\) Rs. 7200 3 Equation for k% discount \(7200 \times (1 - k/100) = 6120\) \(1 - k/100 = 17/20\) 4 Solve for k \(k/100 = 3/20 \implies k = 15\) k = 15% 5 New single discount (k + 20)% = (15 + 20)% 35% 6 Selling price with 35% discount \(10000 \times (1 - 0.35)\) Rs. 6500 Final Selling Price Result The selling price of the article with a single discount of (k + 20)% or 35% is Rs. 6500. Revision Table: Key Concepts Concept Explanation Marked Price (MP) The price printed on the article, before any discounts. Selling Price (SP) The price at which the article is sold after discounts or including profit. Discount A reduction in the marked price. Usually expressed as a percentage. Successive Discounts Multiple discounts applied one after another, with each discount calculated on the reduced price. Single Equivalent Discount A single discount percentage that results in the same final selling price as a series of successive discounts. Additional Information: Discount Formulas Here are some useful formulas related to discounts: Discount Amount = Marked Price - Selling Price Discount Percentage = \(\left(\frac{\text{Discount Amount}}{\text{Marked Price}}\right) \times 100\) Selling Price = Marked Price \(\times \left(1 - \frac{\text{Discount \%}}{100}\right)\) For two successive discounts \(d_1\%\) and \(d_2\%\), the single equivalent discount is \(\left(d_1 + d_2 - \frac{d_1 d_2}{100}\right)\%\). This can be extended for more discounts. In this problem, we used the formula for calculating the final selling price after successive discounts to find the value of k. Then, we used the basic discount formula to find the selling price with a single combined discount.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 69archived

Study the following table and answer the question: Number of students enrolled for Vocational Courses (VC) in five institutes - A, B, C, D & E. Year Institute 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 A 120 135 130 135 128 140 B 125 132 138 132 135 142 C 125 120 125 138 140 135 D 100 125 122 140 128 138 E 105 110 115 147 130 145 The total number of students enrolled for VC in institute C in 2013, 2014 and 2017 is what percent of the total number of students enrolled in all the five institutes in 2018?

  1. A
    53
  2. B
    62
  3. C
    58
  4. D
    55
Show answer
D. 55

Analyze the Data Table Question The question asks us to calculate a specific percentage based on the data provided in the table. We need to find the total number of students enrolled in Vocational Courses (VC) in institute C across three specific years (2013, 2014, and 2017) and express this sum as a percentage of the total number of students enrolled in VC across all five institutes (A, B, C, D, and E) in a single year (2018). Understanding the Question's Goal To solve this problem, we need to perform two main calculations: Sum the number of students enrolled in institute C for the years 2013, 2014, and 2017. Sum the number of students enrolled in all five institutes (A, B, C, D, E) for the year 2018. Divide the sum from step 1 by the sum from step 2 and multiply by 100 to get the required percentage. Calculating Total Enrollment in Institute C First, let's find the total number of students enrolled for VC in institute C for the specified years: Institute C, 2013: 125 Institute C, 2014: 120 Institute C, 2017: 140 Total enrollment in Institute C (2013, 2014, 2017) = $125 + 120 + 140 = 385$. So, the total number of students enrolled for VC in institute C in 2013, 2014 and 2017 is 385. Calculating Total Enrollment Across All Institutes in 2018 Next, let's find the total number of students enrolled for VC in all five institutes in the year 2018: Institute A, 2018: 140 Institute B, 2018: 142 Institute C, 2018: 135 Institute D, 2018: 138 Institute E, 2018: 145 Total enrollment in all institutes (2018) = $140 + 142 + 135 + 138 + 145 = 700$. So, the total number of students enrolled in all the five institutes in 2018 is 700. Determining the Percentage Now, we need to find what percent the total enrollment in institute C (2013, 2014, 2017) is of the total enrollment in all institutes in 2018. The formula for percentage is: $\text{Percentage} = \left( \frac{\text{Part}}{\text{Whole}} \right) \times 100$ In this case: Part = Total enrollment in Institute C (2013, 2014, 2017) = 385 Whole = Total enrollment in all institutes (2018) = 700 Percentage = $\left( \frac{385}{700} \right) \times 100$ Percentage = $\frac{385}{7}$ Percentage = $55$ Final Answer Derivation The total number of students enrolled for VC in institute C in 2013, 2014 and 2017 is 385. The total number of students enrolled in all the five institutes in 2018 is 700. The percentage is calculated as: $\text{Percentage} = \frac{385}{700} \times 100 = \frac{385}{7} = 55$. Thus, the total number of students enrolled for VC in institute C in 2013, 2014 and 2017 is 55 percent of the total number of students enrolled in all the five institutes in 2018. Revision Table: Vocational Course Enrollment Analysis Item Value Total enrollment in Institute C (2013, 2014, 2017) $125 + 120 + 140 = 385$ Total enrollment in all Institutes (2018) $140 + 142 + 135 + 138 + 145 = 700$ Required Percentage $\left( \frac{385}{700} \right) \times 100 = 55\%$ Additional Information: Data Interpretation Tips When working with data tables for exams like this, consider the following tips: Read the question carefully to identify exactly which values are needed (specific institutes, specific years). Be mindful of whether the question asks for a total, average, ratio, or percentage. Double-check your sums and calculations to avoid arithmetic errors. Break down complex questions into smaller, manageable steps, as demonstrated in the solution above. Ensure you understand the units or quantities represented by the numbers in the table.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 70archived

If the 6-digit number 5x423y is divisible by 88. then what is the value of (5x - 8y)?

  1. A
    28
  2. B
    14
  3. C
    16
  4. D
    24
Show answer
D. 24

Understanding Divisibility by 88 A number is divisible by 88 if and only if it is divisible by both 8 and 11, because 8 and 11 are coprime factors of 88. The given 6-digit number is $5x423y$. We need to find the values of the digits $x$ and $y$ based on the divisibility rules for 8 and 11. Applying the Divisibility Rule for 8 A number is divisible by 8 if the number formed by its last three digits is divisible by 8. For the number $5x423y$, the last three digits form the number $23y$. Therefore, $23y$ must be divisible by 8. Let's test possible values for $y$ (which must be a digit from 0 to 9): If $y=0$, $230 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=1$, $231 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=2$, $232 \div 8 = 29$. This is exactly divisible. If $y=3$, $233 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=4$, $234 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=5$, $235 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=6$, $236 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=7$, $237 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=8$, $238 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. If $y=9$, $239 \div 8$ leaves a remainder. The only single digit $y$ for which $23y$ is divisible by 8 is $y=2$. So, we know that $y=2$. Applying the Divisibility Rule for 11 A number is divisible by 11 if the alternating sum of its digits is divisible by 11. For the number $5x423y$, the alternating sum of the digits is calculated as: $( \text{Sum of digits at odd places from the right} ) - ( \text{Sum of digits at even places from the right} )$ The digits from right to left are $y, 3, 2, 4, x, 5$. Alternating sum $= y - 3 + 2 - 4 + x - 5$ We know $y=2$, so substitute $y=2$ into the expression: Alternating sum $= 2 - 3 + 2 - 4 + x - 5$ Alternating sum $= (2 + 2 + x) - (3 + 4 + 5)$ Alternating sum $= (4 + x) - 12$ Alternating sum $= x - 8$ According to the divisibility rule for 11, this alternating sum $(x - 8)$ must be divisible by 11. Since $x$ is a single digit (0-9), the possible values for $(x-8)$ that are divisible by 11 are $0, 11, -11, 22, -22, \dots$. Let's check the possibilities for $(x-8)$ within the range of possible values for $x-8$ when $x \in \{0, 1, \dots, 9\}$ (i.e., $x-8 \in \{-8, -7, \dots, 1\}$): If $x - 8 = 0$, then $x = 8$. This is a valid digit (0-9). If $x - 8 = 11$, then $x = 19$. Not a valid digit. If $x - 8 = -11$, then $x = -3$. Not a valid digit. Any other multiple of 11 would result in $x$ being outside the range 0-9. Therefore, the only possible value for $x$ is 8. So, we know that $x=8$. Calculating the Value of (5x - 8y) We have found that $x=8$ and $y=2$. Now we need to find the value of the expression $(5x - 8y)$. Substitute the values of $x$ and $y$ into the expression: $5x - 8y = 5(8) - 8(2)$ $5x - 8y = 40 - 16$ $5x - 8y = 24$ The value of $(5x - 8y)$ is 24. Revision Table: Divisibility Rules Applied Rule Condition Application to 5x423y Result Divisibility by 8 Last 3 digits form a number divisible by 8. 23y is divisible by 8. y = 2 Divisibility by 11 Alternating sum of digits is divisible by 11. $5 - x + 4 - 2 + 3 - y$ is divisible by 11. Substituting y=2: $5 - x + 4 - 2 + 3 - 2 = 8 - x$ is divisible by 11. x = 8 Additional Information: Importance of Divisibility Rules Divisibility rules are useful shortcuts for determining if a number is divisible by another number without performing long division. Understanding these rules can significantly speed up calculations in various mathematical problems and tests. Divisibility by 8: Check the number formed by the last three digits. If this number is divisible by 8, the original number is also divisible by 8. Divisibility by 11: Calculate the alternating sum of the digits (starting from the rightmost digit, subtract the next, add the next, and so on). If the result is 0 or a multiple of 11, the original number is divisible by 11. When a number must be divisible by a composite number like 88 (which is $8 \times 11$), and the factors (8 and 11) are coprime (their greatest common divisor is 1), the number must be divisible by each of these coprime factors individually. This is a fundamental concept used in solving this type of problem.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 71archived

Angle between the internal bisectors of two angles ∠B and ∠C of a ΔABC is 132°, then the value of ∠A is

  1. A
    72°
  2. B
    48°
  3. C
    62°
  4. D
    84°
Show answer
D. 84°

Finding Angle A Using Internal Angle Bisectors Let's analyze the given problem involving a triangle and its internal angle bisectors. We are given a triangle ΔABC, and the internal bisectors of angles ∠B and ∠C meet at a point, say I. The angle formed at this point I, which is ∠BIC, is given as 132°. We need to find the measure of angle ∠A. Understanding Internal Angle Bisectors An internal angle bisector of a triangle divides the angle into two equal parts. The point where the internal angle bisectors of a triangle meet is called the incenter. This point is equidistant from the sides of the triangle. Formula for Angle Between Internal Bisectors There is a standard formula that relates the angle formed by the internal bisectors of two angles of a triangle to the third angle of the triangle. If the internal bisectors of ∠B and ∠C of ΔABC meet at I, the angle ∠BIC is given by the formula: \[ \angle \text{BIC} = 90^\circ + \frac{\angle \text{A}}{2} \] Applying the Formula to Solve the Problem We are given that the angle between the internal bisectors of ∠B and ∠C is 132°. So, we have: \[ \angle \text{BIC} = 132^\circ \] Now, we can substitute this value into the formula: \[ 132^\circ = 90^\circ + \frac{\angle \text{A}}{2} \] To find the value of ∠A, we need to isolate it. First, subtract 90° from both sides of the equation: \[ 132^\circ - 90^\circ = \frac{\angle \text{A}}{2} \] \[ 42^\circ = \frac{\angle \text{A}}{2} \] Now, multiply both sides by 2 to solve for ∠A: \[ \angle \text{A} = 42^\circ \times 2 \] \[ \angle \text{A} = 84^\circ \] Thus, the value of angle ∠A is 84°. Step-by-Step Calculation Summary Identify the given information: ∠BIC = 132° (angle between internal bisectors of ∠B and ∠C). Recall the formula: ∠BIC = 90° + ∠A/2. Substitute the known value into the formula: 132° = 90° + ∠A/2. Solve for ∠A: 132° - 90° = ∠A/2 42° = ∠A/2 ∠A = 42° * 2 ∠A = 84° Verification If ∠A = 84°, let's calculate ∠BIC using the formula: \[ \angle \text{BIC} = 90^\circ + \frac{84^\circ}{2} \] \[ \angle \text{BIC} = 90^\circ + 42^\circ \] \[ \angle \text{BIC} = 132^\circ \] This matches the given information, confirming our calculation is correct. Revision Table: Key Triangle Angle Formulas Concept Description Formula Sum of angles in a triangle The sum of the interior angles of any triangle is 180°. ∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180° Angle between internal bisectors (∠B and ∠C) Angle formed by the intersection of internal bisectors of two angles. ∠BIC = 90° + ∠A/2 Angle between external bisectors (∠B and ∠C) Angle formed by the intersection of external bisectors of two angles. Angle = 90° - ∠A/2 Angle between internal bisector (∠B) and external bisector (∠C) Angle formed by the intersection of internal bisector of one angle and external bisector of another. Angle = ∠A/2 Additional Information: Properties of Incenter and Angle Bisectors The incenter is the center of the inscribed circle (incircle) of the triangle. The incenter is equidistant from the three sides of the triangle. This distance is the radius of the incircle. Every point on an angle bisector is equidistant from the two sides forming the angle. Internal angle bisectors always intersect inside the triangle. External angle bisectors can intersect inside or outside the triangle, depending on the angles involved.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 72archived

Table shows income (in Rs.) received by 4 employees of a company during the month of December 2020 and all their income sources. Source Amit Suresh Nitin Varun Salary 35000 38000 29000 42000 Arrears 6000 6300 5000 7500 Bonus 1000 1100 1000 1240 Overtime 1800 1950 1400 1500 By what percent are the Arrears of Amit and Suresh taken together less than the Arrears of Nitin and Varun taken together?

  1. A
    1.6
  2. B
    1.2
  3. C
    1.4
  4. D
    1.5
Show answer
A. 1.6

Analyzing Employee Arrears Data This question requires us to analyze the provided table showing the income sources of four employees and calculate a percentage difference based on their arrears. We need to find out by what percentage the combined arrears of Amit and Suresh are less than the combined arrears of Nitin and Varun. Employee Income Data (December 2020) Source Amit (Rs.) Suresh (Rs.) Nitin (Rs.) Varun (Rs.) Salary 35000 38000 29000 42000 Arrears 6000 6300 5000 7500 Bonus 1000 1100 1000 1240 Overtime 1800 1950 1400 1500 Step-by-Step Arrears Calculation First, let's extract the arrears data for the relevant employees from the table: Amit's Arrears: Rs. 6000 Suresh's Arrears: Rs. 6300 Nitin's Arrears: Rs. 5000 Varun's Arrears: Rs. 7500 1. Calculate Combined Arrears for Amit and Suresh Add the arrears of Amit and Suresh together: Combined Arrears (Amit + Suresh) = Amit's Arrears + Suresh's Arrears Combined Arrears (Amit + Suresh) = Rs. 6000 + Rs. 6300 = Rs. 12300 2. Calculate Combined Arrears for Nitin and Varun Add the arrears of Nitin and Varun together: Combined Arrears (Nitin + Varun) = Nitin's Arrears + Varun's Arrears Combined Arrears (Nitin + Varun) = Rs. 5000 + Rs. 7500 = Rs. 12500 3. Calculate the Difference in Combined Arrears Find the difference between the combined arrears of Nitin and Varun and the combined arrears of Amit and Suresh: Difference = Combined Arrears (Nitin + Varun) - Combined Arrears (Amit + Suresh) Difference = Rs. 12500 - Rs. 12300 = Rs. 200 4. Calculate the Percentage Less The question asks by what percent the arrears of Amit and Suresh are less than the arrears of Nitin and Varun. This means the percentage difference should be calculated with respect to the combined arrears of Nitin and Varun. Percentage Less = $\left( \frac{\text{Difference}}{\text{Combined Arrears (Nitin + Varun)}} \right) \times 100$ Percentage Less = $\left( \frac{200}{12500} \right) \times 100$ Percentage Less = $\left( \frac{200}{125} \right)$ To simplify the fraction $\frac{200}{125}$, we can divide both numerator and denominator by their greatest common divisor, which is 25. $\frac{200 \div 25}{125 \div 25} = \frac{8}{5}$ Now, convert the fraction to a decimal: $\frac{8}{5} = 1.6$ So, the arrears of Amit and Suresh taken together are 1.6 percent less than the arrears of Nitin and Varun taken together. Revision Table: Key Concepts Concept Description Formula Example Percentage Difference Compares the difference between two values relative to one of the values (often the base or original value), expressed as a percentage. $\frac{|V_1 - V_2|}{V_{base}} \times 100\%$ "Percent Less Than" Indicates the percentage decrease from a base value. The difference is relative to the "than" value. $\frac{\text{Base Value} - \text{Compared Value}}{\text{Base Value}} \times 100\%$ Additional Information on Data Interpretation Data interpretation questions often involve analyzing information presented in tables, charts, or graphs to answer specific questions. These questions test your ability to quickly and accurately extract relevant data, perform calculations (like sums, averages, percentages, ratios), and compare quantities. Understanding Tables: Pay attention to row and column headers and the units used (e.g., Rs., percent). Reading the Question Carefully: Identify exactly what is being asked. Is it a sum, a difference, a ratio, a percentage increase, or a percentage decrease? Identifying the Base Value: For percentage increase/decrease questions, correctly identifying the 'original' or 'base' value is crucial for the denominator in the percentage calculation. In this question, "less than the Arrears of Nitin and Varun" means Nitin and Varun's combined arrears are the base. Calculations: Perform arithmetic operations accurately. For percentages, remember the formula $\left( \frac{\text{Part}}{\text{Whole}} \right) \times 100$. Practicing with different types of data representations (tables, bar graphs, pie charts, line graphs) and various question types will help improve your data interpretation skills for exams.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 73archived

A sum of Rs. 7500 amounts to Rs. 9075 at 10% p.a, interest being compounded yearly in a certain time. The simple interest (in Rs.) on the same sum for the same time and the same rate is:

  1. A
    1500
  2. B
    1530
  3. C
    1480
  4. D
    1520
Show answer
A. 1500

Calculating Simple Interest from Compound Interest Data This problem involves two types of interest: compound interest and simple interest. We are given information about a sum of money growing under compound interest and asked to find the simple interest on the same sum for the same time period and rate. Understanding the Given Information Principal sum (P) = Rs. 7500 Amount after compounding (A) = Rs. 9075 Rate of interest (R) = 10% per annum Compounding Frequency: Yearly We need to find the time period (T) first. Then, we need to calculate the Simple Interest (SI) for the same P, R, and the calculated T. Step 1: Finding the Time Period (T) The formula for the Amount (A) under compound interest compounded yearly is: \( A = P \left(1 + \frac{R}{100}\right)^T \) Let's substitute the given values into the formula: \( 9075 = 7500 \left(1 + \frac{10}{100}\right)^T \) Simplify the term inside the bracket: \( 9075 = 7500 \left(1 + 0.1\right)^T \) \( 9075 = 7500 (1.1)^T \) Now, isolate the term with T by dividing both sides by 7500: \( \frac{9075}{7500} = (1.1)^T \) Calculate the value on the left side: \( \frac{9075}{7500} = \frac{121 \times 75}{100 \times 75} = \frac{121}{100} = 1.21 \) So, we have: \( 1.21 = (1.1)^T \) We know that \( (1.1)^2 = 1.1 \times 1.1 = 1.21 \). Comparing this with the equation, we find T. \( (1.1)^2 = (1.1)^T \) Therefore, the time period \( T = 2 \) years. Step 2: Calculating Simple Interest (SI) Now that we have the time period (T = 2 years), we can calculate the simple interest on the original sum (P = Rs. 7500) at the same rate (R = 10% p.a.) for this time. The formula for Simple Interest (SI) is: \( SI = \frac{P \times R \times T}{100} \) Substitute the values: \( SI = \frac{7500 \times 10 \times 2}{100} \) Perform the multiplication in the numerator: \( SI = \frac{7500 \times 20}{100} \) Now, divide by 100: \( SI = \frac{150000}{100} \) \( SI = 1500 \) The simple interest on the sum for the same time and rate is Rs. 1500. Final Answer The simple interest on Rs. 7500 for 2 years at 10% p.a. is Rs. 1500. Particulars Value Principal (P) Rs. 7500 Amount (CI) Rs. 9075 Rate (R) 10% p.a. Time (T) - Calculated 2 Years Simple Interest (SI) - Calculated Rs. 1500 Revision Table: Interest Formulas Concept Formula Notes Simple Interest (SI) \( SI = \frac{P \times R \times T}{100} \) Interest calculated only on the principal amount. P=Principal, R=Rate (% per annum), T=Time (in years). Amount (A) with Simple Interest \( A = P + SI \) or \( A = P \left(1 + \frac{RT}{100}\right) \) Total amount after earning simple interest. Amount (A) with Compound Interest (yearly) \( A = P \left(1 + \frac{R}{100}\right)^T \) Interest is added to the principal at the end of each year and earns interest in subsequent years. Compound Interest (CI) \( CI = A - P \) or \( CI = P \left[ \left(1 + \frac{R}{100}\right)^T - 1 \right] \) The difference between the amount and the principal. Additional Information on Simple and Compound Interest Simple interest is the most basic form of interest calculation. It is calculated only on the initial principal amount for the entire duration. The interest earned in previous periods does not add to the principal for calculating interest in the current period. Compound interest, on the other hand, is calculated on the principal amount and also on the accumulated interest of previous periods. This means that the principal effectively increases over time, leading to exponential growth in the amount. The frequency of compounding (yearly, half-yearly, quarterly, etc.) affects the total interest earned. In this problem, we first used the compound interest formula to find the unknown time period, as the amount after compounding was given. Once the time was determined, we applied the simple interest formula using the same principal, rate, and the calculated time period to find the required simple interest value. Understanding both formulas and how to manipulate them to find different variables like time or rate is crucial for solving such problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 74archived

The value of \(\frac{52-1170\div26+13\times2}{2+1\frac{1}{8}\ \rm of\ 2-1\frac{1}{4}}\) is:

  1. A
    12
  2. B
    11
  3. C
    27
  4. D
    41
Show answer
B. 11

Simplifying Mathematical Expressions To find the value of the given expression, we need to follow the order of operations, often remembered by acronyms like BODMAS or PEMDAS. The expression is: \(\frac{52-1170\div26+13\times2}{2+1\frac{1}{8}\ \rm of\ 2-1\frac{1}{4}}\) We will evaluate the numerator and the denominator separately. Evaluating the Numerator The numerator is \(52-1170\div26+13\times2\). According to the order of operations: First, perform division: \(1170 \div 26\) Second, perform multiplication: \(13 \times 2\) Third, perform addition and subtraction from left to right. Let's calculate the division: \(1170 \div 26 = 45\) Now, let's calculate the multiplication: \(13 \times 2 = 26\) Substitute these values back into the numerator expression: \(52 - 45 + 26\) Now, perform subtraction and addition from left to right: \(52 - 45 = 7\) \(7 + 26 = 33\) So, the value of the numerator is 33. Evaluating the Denominator The denominator is \(2+1\frac{1}{8}\ \rm of\ 2-1\frac{1}{4}\). First, convert the mixed numbers to improper fractions: \(1\frac{1}{8} = \frac{(1 \times 8) + 1}{8} = \frac{9}{8}\) \(1\frac{1}{4} = \frac{(1 \times 4) + 1}{4} = \frac{5}{4}\) The term "of" means multiplication. According to the order of operations, 'of' (or orders/exponents) is done before basic multiplication/division, but after brackets. In simple arithmetic expressions like this, it's often grouped with multiplication. Perform the 'of' operation: \(1\frac{1}{8}\ \rm of\ 2 = \frac{9}{8} \times 2 = \frac{9 \times 2}{8} = \frac{18}{8} = \frac{9}{4}\) Substitute the values back into the denominator expression: \(2 + \frac{9}{4} - \frac{5}{4}\) To add and subtract these fractions, we need a common denominator, which is 4. Convert 2 to a fraction with denominator 4: \(2 = \frac{2 \times 4}{4} = \frac{8}{4}\) The expression becomes: \(\frac{8}{4} + \frac{9}{4} - \frac{5}{4}\) Now, perform addition and subtraction from left to right: \(\frac{8}{4} + \frac{9}{4} = \frac{8+9}{4} = \frac{17}{4}\) \(\frac{17}{4} - \frac{5}{4} = \frac{17-5}{4} = \frac{12}{4} = 3\) So, the value of the denominator is 3. Final Calculation Now we divide the numerator by the denominator: \(\frac{\text{Numerator}}{\text{Denominator}} = \frac{33}{3}\) \(\frac{33}{3} = 11\) The value of the given expression is 11. Part Expression Steps Value Numerator \(52-1170\div26+13\times2\) \(52 - 45 + 26\) 33 Denominator \(2+1\frac{1}{8}\ \rm of\ 2-1\frac{1}{4}\) \(2 + \frac{9}{4} - \frac{5}{4} = \frac{8}{4} + \frac{9}{4} - \frac{5}{4} = \frac{17}{4} - \frac{5}{4} = \frac{12}{4}\) 3 Final Value \(\frac{\text{Numerator}}{\text{Denominator}}\) \(\frac{33}{3}\) 11 Comparing this value with the given options, we find that 11 matches one of the options. Revision Table: Order of Operations Order Operation Type Description 1 Brackets/Parentheses Calculations inside brackets first. 2 Orders/Exponents/'Of' Powers, roots, and fractions introduced by 'of'. 3 Division and Multiplication From left to right. 4 Addition and Subtraction From left to right. Additional Information: Working with Mixed Numbers and Fractions A mixed number combines a whole number and a fraction, like \(1\frac{1}{8}\). To convert a mixed number \(a\frac{b}{c}\) to an improper fraction, use the formula: \(\frac{(a \times c) + b}{c}\). When adding or subtracting fractions, they must have a common denominator. If they don't, find the least common multiple (LCM) of the denominators and rewrite each fraction with this new denominator. The word "of" in mathematical context, especially with fractions or percentages, typically means multiplication. For example, "half of 10" means \(\frac{1}{2} \times 10\).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 75archived

On selling an article for Rs. 246.80, the gain is 20% more than the amount of loss incurred on selling it for Rs. 216. If the article is sold for Rs. 220.75, then what is the gain/loss percent (correct to nearest integer)?

  1. A
    Profit 7%
  2. B
    Loss 4%
  3. C
    Loss 5%
  4. D
    Profit 3%
Show answer
B. Loss 4%

Understanding the Profit and Loss Scenario The question describes a situation involving profit and loss when an article is sold at different prices. We are given two selling prices and the relationship between the gain and loss incurred at these prices. Our goal is to find the cost price (CP) of the article and then calculate the gain or loss percentage if it is sold at a third price. Setting up the Equations for Cost Price Let the Cost Price (CP) of the article be Rs. \(x\). When the article is sold for Rs. 246.80, there is a gain. The amount of gain (G1) is calculated as: Gain (G1) = Selling Price 1 - Cost Price \[ G1 = 246.80 - x \] When the article is sold for Rs. 216.00, there is a loss. The amount of loss (L2) is calculated as: Loss (L2) = Cost Price - Selling Price 2 \[ L2 = x - 216.00 \] We are given that the gain on selling the article for Rs. 246.80 is 20% more than the loss incurred on selling it for Rs. 216. This can be written as: Gain (G1) = Loss (L2) + 20% of Loss (L2) \[ G1 = L2 + 0.20 \times L2 \] \[ G1 = 1.20 \times L2 \] Now, substitute the expressions for G1 and L2 into this equation: \[ 246.80 - x = 1.20 \times (x - 216.00) \] Solving for the Cost Price Let's solve the equation to find the cost price \(x\): \[ 246.80 - x = 1.20x - 1.20 \times 216.00 \] \[ 246.80 - x = 1.20x - 259.20 \] Now, rearrange the terms to isolate \(x\): \[ 246.80 + 259.20 = 1.20x + x \] \[ 506.00 = 2.20x \] \[ x = \frac{506.00}{2.20} \] \[ x = \frac{5060}{22} \] \[ x = 230 \] So, the Cost Price (CP) of the article is Rs. 230.00. Calculating Gain or Loss at the New Selling Price The article is now sold for a third price, Rs. 220.75. To determine if there is a gain or loss, we compare this selling price (SP3) with the cost price (CP). Selling Price 3 (SP3) = Rs. 220.75 Cost Price (CP) = Rs. 230.00 Since SP3 < CP, there is a loss. Amount of Loss = Cost Price - Selling Price 3 \[ \text{Loss} = 230.00 - 220.75 \] \[ \text{Loss} = 9.25 \] The loss incurred is Rs. 9.25. Calculating the Loss Percentage To find the loss percentage, we use the formula: \[ \text{Loss Percentage} = \frac{\text{Loss}}{\text{Cost Price}} \times 100 \] Substitute the values: \[ \text{Loss Percentage} = \frac{9.25}{230.00} \times 100 \] \[ \text{Loss Percentage} = \frac{925}{230} \] \[ \text{Loss Percentage} \approx 4.0217 \dots \] Rounding to the Nearest Integer The question asks for the gain/loss percentage correct to the nearest integer. Rounding 4.0217... to the nearest integer gives 4. Since we calculated a loss, the result is approximately 4% loss. Comparing with Options Based on our calculation, there is a loss of approximately 4%. Option 1: Profit 7% (Incorrect) Option 2: Loss 4% (Correct) Option 3: Loss 5% (Incorrect) Option 4: Profit 3% (Incorrect) The calculated loss percentage of approximately 4% matches Option 2. Scenario Selling Price (Rs.) Outcome Calculation Scenario 1 246.80 Gain Gain = 246.80 - CP Scenario 2 216.00 Loss Loss = CP - 216.00 Scenario 3 220.75 Loss Loss = 230.00 - 220.75 = 9.25 Revision Table: Key Concepts in Profit and Loss Concept Formula Description Cost Price (CP) - The original price at which an article is bought. Selling Price (SP) - The price at which an article is sold. Gain or Profit Gain = SP - CP (when SP > CP) The amount by which selling price exceeds cost price. Loss Loss = CP - SP (when CP > SP) The amount by which cost price exceeds selling price. Gain Percentage \(\frac{\text{Gain}}{\text{CP}} \times 100\) Gain expressed as a percentage of the cost price. Loss Percentage \(\frac{\text{Loss}}{\text{CP}} \times 100\) Loss expressed as a percentage of the cost price. Additional Information: Percentage Calculations Understanding percentage increase and decrease is crucial in profit and loss problems. If quantity A is P% more than quantity B, then A = B + P% of B = \(B \times (1 + \frac{P}{100})\). In our problem, Gain is 20% more than Loss, so Gain = Loss \(\times (1 + \frac{20}{100}) = \text{Loss} \times 1.20\). Calculating percentages requires the base value, which is typically the Cost Price (CP) in profit and loss scenarios. The gain or loss amount is divided by the CP, and then multiplied by 100 to get the percentage. These fundamental concepts help in setting up the correct equations to solve problems involving varying selling prices and their resulting gains or losses.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 76archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in the blank. A ______ souvenir will be released on the occasion of the World Meet.

  1. A
    considerable
  2. B
    voluminous
  3. C
    generous
  4. D
    bountiful
Show answer
B. voluminous

Understanding the Blank: Choosing the Right Word The question asks us to select the most appropriate word to describe a "souvenir" that will be "released" on the occasion of a "World Meet". A souvenir is something kept as a reminder of a place or event. A World Meet suggests a large, significant gathering. We need a word that describes a characteristic of this souvenir in the context of being released for a major event. Let's look at the options provided: Analyzing the Options considerable: This word means large in amount, size, or extent; significant. It suggests something important or significant, but might not specifically describe its physical size. voluminous: This word means occupying or containing much space; large in volume. It can also refer to something consisting of many or lengthy writings (like a book or report). This directly relates to physical size or bulk. generous: This word means showing a readiness to give more of something than is necessary or expected; liberal in giving. This describes an act of giving or a quality of a person, not typically the physical nature of an object like a souvenir. bountiful: This word means large in quantity; abundant. It's often used to describe harvests or supplies, implying a large amount of something, usually resources. While it implies abundance, it doesn't specifically describe the characteristic of a single released item. Evaluating the Best Fit We are describing a souvenir released for a World Meet. Such a souvenir might be a substantial item, perhaps a large book, a collection of documents, or a physically large object. "Voluminous" is the most fitting word among the options to describe something large in size or volume, which is a plausible characteristic for a significant souvenir for a major event. Let's consider why the others are less suitable: While a souvenir might be "considerable" in significance, "voluminous" is a more direct description of its potential physical form (large size/volume). "Generous" describes the act of giving, not the souvenir itself. A generous *amount* of souvenirs might be given, but the souvenir itself isn't typically described as "generous". "Bountiful" implies abundance or a large quantity of resources, which doesn't typically apply to a single, specific souvenir item. Therefore, "voluminous" is the most appropriate choice to fill the blank, suggesting a souvenir that is substantial in size or volume. Word Meaning Fit for "Souvenir"? considerable Large in amount, size, or extent; significant. Possible (significant), but less precise about physical size. voluminous Occupying or containing much space; large in volume. Most appropriate (describes physical size/bulk). generous Liberal in giving; ample. No (describes giving, not the object). bountiful Large in quantity; abundant. No (implies abundance of resources, not a single item's characteristic). Conclusion: The Voluminous Souvenir Based on the meanings of the words, "voluminous" best describes a souvenir for a large event, suggesting it is substantial or large in size or volume. The sentence "A voluminous souvenir will be released on the occasion of the World Meet" makes logical sense, implying a significant, perhaps large or comprehensive, commemorative item. Revision Table: Key Vocabulary for World Meets Term Definition in Context Souvenir An item kept as a reminder of a place or event. World Meet A large international gathering or meeting. Voluminous Large in size or volume; bulky. Considerable Significant in amount, size, or importance. Generous Giving or given freely; ample. Bountiful Large in quantity; abundant. Additional Information: Describing Objects and Events When describing objects and events, choosing the right adjective is crucial for clarity and precision. Different words can describe size, quantity, importance, or impact. Adjectives like voluminous, large, huge, tiny describe physical size. Adjectives like considerable, significant, important, minor describe importance or impact. Adjectives like bountiful, abundant, ample, scarce describe quantity or supply. Adjectives like generous, liberal, stingy describe qualities related to giving. In this case, "voluminous" provides specific information about the physical characteristic (size/volume) of the souvenir, which is a common way to describe such an item, especially when it's substantial for a major event.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 77archived

Select the option that can be used as a one-word substitute for the given group of words. A large building with an extensive floor area, typically for housing aircraft.

  1. A
    Shed
  2. B
    Airport
  3. C
    Hangar
  4. D
    Bam
Show answer
C. Hangar

Finding the One-Word Substitute for Aircraft Buildings The question asks for a single word that describes a large building with an extensive floor area, primarily used for housing aircraft. To answer this type of question, we need to understand the specific definitions of the words provided in the options and see which one best fits the description of a building used for housing aircraft. Analyzing the Options for Housing Aircraft Let's look at each option and determine if it accurately describes a large building specifically for housing aircraft: Shed: A shed is typically a simple, single-story structure used for storage, a workshop, or shelter. While it is a building, sheds are generally smaller and not designed for housing large vehicles like aircraft. Airport: An airport is a complex facility that includes runways, terminals, control towers, maintenance areas, and various buildings. It is a location where aircraft operate, but the word "airport" refers to the entire complex, not just a single building used for housing aircraft. Hangar: A hangar is a large building with an extensive floor area specifically designed to house, maintain, and repair aircraft. Hangars have large doors to allow aircraft to enter and exit. This definition perfectly matches the description provided in the question. Barn: A barn is an agricultural building found on farms, primarily used for storing crops, housing livestock (like cows, horses, or chickens), or storing farm equipment. It is not designed or typically used for housing aircraft. Identifying the Correct Term for Housing Aircraft Based on the analysis of the options, the term that specifically refers to a large building used for housing aircraft is "Hangar". The description given in the question precisely matches the definition of a hangar. Therefore, the one-word substitute for "A large building with an extensive floor area, typically for housing aircraft" is Hangar. Comparison of Building Types Term Typical Use Suitable for Housing Aircraft? Shed Storage, Workshop No (usually too small) Airport Entire facility for aircraft operation No (not a single building) Hangar Housing, Maintenance, Repair of Aircraft Yes Barn Agriculture (crops, livestock, equipment) No Revision Table: Aircraft Building Vocabulary Key Terms and Definitions Word Definition Relevant to Question Hangar A large building used to house aircraft. Shed A simple, usually small, building used for storage or shelter. Airport A complex facility where aircraft take off and land. Barn An agricultural building used for storage or livestock. Additional Information on Aircraft Hangars Hangars are essential structures at airports and airbases. They serve multiple purposes beyond just housing aircraft, including: Protecting aircraft from weather elements like sun, rain, snow, and wind. Providing a secure environment for aircraft when not in use. Offering a controlled space for aircraft maintenance, repair, and inspections. Serving as a base for aircraft operations and logistics. Hangars can vary significantly in size, from small ones for light aircraft to massive structures capable of housing multiple large commercial airliners or military transport planes. Their design often includes wide-span roofs to minimize internal columns and large, high doors.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 78archived

The following sentence has been divided into four parts. One of them contains an error. Select the part that contains the error from the given options. The Principal requested / the teacher’s / to monitor / and take care of the small children.

  1. A
    the teacher's
  2. B
    to monitor
  3. C
    The Principal requested
  4. D
    and take care of the small children
Show answer
A. the teacher's

Identifying Grammatical Errors in Sentences The question asks us to find the part of the given sentence that contains a grammatical error. The sentence provided is divided into four parts: The Principal requested / the teacher’s / to monitor / and take care of the small children. Analyzing Each Part for Errors Let's examine each part carefully: The Principal requested: This part acts as the subject and verb of the sentence. "The Principal" is the subject, and "requested" is the verb. This structure is grammatically correct. the teacher’s: This part follows the verb "requested". The verb "request" often takes an object (who is being requested) followed by an infinitive phrase (what they are being requested to do). In this context, the Principal requested *someone* to monitor and take care of the children. The phrase "the teacher's" uses the possessive form of the noun "teacher". The possessive form indicates ownership or belonging (e.g., "the teacher's book" means the book belonging to the teacher). However, the sentence requires the *plural form* of the noun "teacher" because it is likely referring to multiple teachers who are being requested to perform the action, and the verb 'requested' needs a direct object noun/pronoun, not a possessive adjective modifying an implied noun or a possessive pronoun. to monitor: This is an infinitive phrase ("to" + verb). It correctly follows the structure "request someone to do something". This part is grammatically correct. and take care of the small children: This is another verb phrase coordinated with "to monitor". It also follows the structure "request someone to monitor and take care...". This part is grammatically correct. Pinpointing the Sentence Error Based on the analysis, the error lies in the use of the possessive form “the teacher’s” instead of the plural noun “the teachers”. The sentence structure requires the object of the verb "requested", which should be the group of people being requested. Therefore, "the teachers" (plural noun) is needed, not "the teacher's" (possessive form). The correct sentence should be: "The Principal requested the teachers to monitor and take care of the small children." Conclusion on the Error Part The part of the sentence containing the error is "the teacher’s". Part of Sentence Analysis Error? The Principal requested Subject + Verb No the teacher’s Incorrect form (possessive used instead of plural noun) Yes to monitor Infinitive phrase (part of action requested) No and take care of the small children Verb phrase (part of action requested) No Revision Table: Correcting the Sentence Error Here is a table summarizing the incorrect and correct usage in this sentence. Incorrect Part Correct Form Reason the teacher’s the teachers The verb 'requested' requires a direct object (the people being requested), which should be the plural noun 'teachers', not the possessive 'teacher's'. Additional Information: Possessives vs. Plurals Understanding the difference between possessive nouns and plural nouns is crucial for avoiding this type of grammatical error. Plural Nouns: These represent more than one of a noun. Most nouns form the plural by adding '-s' or '-es' (e.g., teacher > teachers, box > boxes). They are used when referring to multiple items or people. Possessive Nouns: These show ownership or possession. They are usually formed by adding an apostrophe and '-s' ('-'s) to a singular noun (e.g., the teacher's desk - the desk belonging to the teacher) or just an apostrophe (') to a plural noun ending in '-s' (e.g., the teachers' lounge - the lounge for the teachers). In the sentence "The Principal requested...", the noun following 'requested' is the direct object, specifying *who* was requested. This position requires the plural form of the noun, not the possessive form, as no ownership is being indicated.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 79archived

Sentences of a paragraph are given below in jumbled order. Arrange the sentences in the right order to form a meaningful and coherent paragraph. A. This invention has helped us to heal wounds caused by bacteria. B. Penicillin is one of the most useful drugs man has invented. C. In the beginning, however, very few people knew of this discovery and its use. D. Its use has saved the lives of hundreds of thousands of soldiers.

  1. A
    ABCD
  2. B
    DCBA
  3. C
    CABD
  4. D
    BADC
Show answer
D. BADC

Arranging Jumbled Sentences: Finding the Right Order for a Paragraph The question asks us to arrange four jumbled sentences (A, B, C, and D) to form a meaningful and coherent paragraph about Penicillin. Let's look at each sentence: Sentence A: This invention has helped us to heal wounds caused by bacteria. Sentence B: Penicillin is one of the most useful drugs man has invented. Sentence C: In the beginning, however, very few people knew of this discovery and its use. Sentence D: Its use has saved the lives of hundreds of thousands of soldiers. We need to find the sentence that introduces the main topic. Sentence B introduces "Penicillin" and states its importance as a "useful drug". This is a strong topic sentence and likely the beginning of the paragraph. Now let's look for connections to Sentence B. Sentence A talks about "This invention". Since Sentence B talks about Penicillin being invented (implicitly, as a drug man invented), "This invention" in A clearly refers to Penicillin. Sentence A describes *how* Penicillin (this invention) is useful – by helping to heal wounds caused by bacteria. So, A follows B logically, explaining one aspect of its usefulness. Next, consider Sentence D. It says "Its use has saved...". "Its use" refers to the use of Penicillin, the useful drug introduced in B and described in A. Sentence D gives a specific, impactful example of Penicillin's use, saving soldiers' lives. This reinforces the idea of its usefulness mentioned in B and A. D fits well after A, providing further evidence of the importance discussed. Finally, look at Sentence C. It starts with "In the beginning, however...". "This discovery" refers to the discovery of Penicillin. The phrase "In the beginning" suggests a historical context, contrasting with the later widespread use described in A and D. The word "however" indicates a contrast or a qualification. After highlighting the great uses and life-saving impact in A and D, Sentence C adds a note that despite its eventual importance, it wasn't immediately recognized or widely known. This serves as a historical perspective or a concluding thought, providing context to its journey from discovery to widespread use. Let's sequence them based on this logic: B: Introduces Penicillin and its usefulness. A: Explains *how* this invention (Penicillin) is useful (healing bacterial wounds). D: Gives a specific example of *its use* (saving soldiers' lives), expanding on the usefulness. C: Provides historical context - *in the beginning*, its discovery and use were not widely known, contrasting with its later significant impact. The logical order is BADC. Order Sentence Reasoning 1 B Introduces the topic (Penicillin) and its main quality (useful drug). 2 A Explains *how* the invention (Penicillin) is useful (heals bacterial wounds), linking directly to B. 3 D Gives a specific, impactful example of *its use* (saving soldiers' lives), reinforcing A and B. 4 C Provides historical context and a contrast ("however", "In the beginning") about the initial limited knowledge of the discovery, fitting after its great uses are described. Final Coherent Paragraph Order: BADC Putting the sentences together in the BADC order gives us the following paragraph: Penicillin is one of the most useful drugs man has invented. This invention has helped us to heal wounds caused by bacteria. Its use has saved the lives of hundreds of thousands of soldiers. In the beginning, however, very few people knew of this discovery and its use. This arrangement forms a smooth and logical flow, starting with the introduction of Penicillin, detailing its uses and impact, and finally providing a historical note about its initial reception. Revision Table: Jumbled Sentence Arrangement Sentence Key Idea Connecting Phrases A Healing wounds caused by bacteria This invention B Penicillin is a useful drug Introduces topic C Limited initial knowledge/use In the beginning, however, this discovery and its use D Saved soldiers' lives Its use Additional Information: Penicillin and its Impact Penicillin was discovered by Alexander Fleming in 1928, but its potential as a medicine wasn't fully realized and developed until the early 1940s by a team led by Howard Florey and Ernst Chain. This delay in its widespread recognition and use aligns with the statement in sentence C, "In the beginning, however, very few people knew of this discovery and its use." Its introduction during World War II dramatically reduced the number of deaths from bacterial infections, making it a revolutionary antibiotic. Sentences A and D correctly highlight its crucial role in healing bacterial wounds and saving the lives of soldiers during this period. Penicillin remains one of the most important antibiotics ever discovered, although the rise of antibiotic resistance poses a challenge to its continued effectiveness.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 80archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in the blank. You need not ______ so much fuss about wearing a mask when you go out.

  1. A
    Cause
  2. B
    generate
  3. C
    do
  4. D
    make
Show answer
D. make

Understanding the Fill-in-the-Blank Question The question asks us to choose the most appropriate verb to complete the sentence: "You need not ______ so much fuss about wearing a mask when you go out." This type of question tests our knowledge of English vocabulary, particularly common collocations and idioms. The sentence is about someone making an unnecessary commotion or showing excessive concern ("fuss") about wearing a mask. We need a verb that correctly pairs with the noun "fuss" in this context. Analyzing the Options for 'Fuss' Let's examine each option provided: Cause: The verb "cause" means to make something happen. While you can "cause trouble" or "cause problems," "cause fuss" is not a standard or natural English collocation. Generate: The verb "generate" typically means to produce or create, often something tangible or quantifiable (like electricity, revenue, ideas). "Generate fuss" is not a common or idiomatic pairing. Do: The verb "do" is very versatile, but it is not typically used directly with "fuss" in this sense. We might "do work" or "do damage," but not "do fuss." Make: The verb "make" is frequently used in idioms and collocations. "Make a fuss" is a very common English idiom meaning to show a lot of unnecessary concern, worry, or excitement about something, often something minor. This fits the context of the sentence perfectly. Why 'Make' is the Correct Choice The phrase "make a fuss" is a standard idiom in English. When someone "makes a fuss," they are creating unnecessary trouble, worry, or protest about something. The sentence implies that the person is reacting excessively to the requirement of wearing a mask. Therefore, the verb that correctly forms this idiom with "fuss" is "make". Comparing the options, "make a fuss" is the only natural-sounding and grammatically correct phrase in this context. The other options do not form standard collocations or idioms with the word "fuss". Let's look at the options and the word 'fuss' in a table: Option Potential Phrase Standard English Usage with 'Fuss' Cause Cause fuss Not standard Generate Generate fuss Not standard Do Do fuss Not standard Make Make fuss (specifically 'make a fuss') Standard idiom Based on common English usage and the idiom "make a fuss," the most appropriate option is 'make'. Revision Table: Key Concepts Concept Explanation Relevance to Question Collocation Words that often go together naturally in a language (e.g., "heavy rain"). Choosing the verb that correctly collocates with "fuss." Idiom A group of words established by usage as having a meaning not deducible from those of the individual words (e.g., "break a leg"). "Make a fuss" is a common idiom. Context The circumstances surrounding a word or phrase that clarify its meaning. Understanding the sentence's meaning helps choose the appropriate verb. Additional Information on Idioms and Collocations Understanding idioms and collocations is crucial for using English naturally and correctly. Idioms are phrases where the meaning isn't obvious from the individual words. "Make a fuss" is a perfect example; it doesn't literally mean to construct a fuss, but to complain or worry excessively. Collocations are word partnerships. Some verbs simply pair naturally with certain nouns or adverbs more than others. For instance, we typically "take a photo," not "make a photo," or "do homework," not "make homework." Learning these common pairings helps improve fluency and accuracy. In this question, the correct answer relies specifically on recognizing the well-established idiom "make a fuss," highlighting the importance of learning such fixed phrases.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 81archived

Select the INCORRECTLY spelt word.

  1. A
    Cerebral
  2. B
    Arbitrary
  3. C
    Scrutinize
  4. D
    Witdrawl
Show answer
D. Witdrawl

Understanding the Question: Identifying Misspellings The question asks us to identify the word that is spelt incorrectly among the given options. This tests our knowledge of common English spellings. Analyzing Each Option Let's examine each word provided in the options to determine if it is spelt correctly. Option 1: Cerebral The word is "Cerebral". This word is related to the cerebrum of the brain or the brain itself. The spelling "Cerebral" is correct. Option 2: Arbitrary The word is "Arbitrary". This word means based on random choice or personal whim, rather than any reason or system. The spelling "Arbitrary" is correct. Option 3: Scrutinize The word is "Scrutinize". This word means to examine or inspect closely and thoroughly. The spelling "Scrutinize" is correct. Option 4: Witdrawl The word is "Witdrawl". Let's consider the common English words that sound similar or have related meanings. The intended word is likely related to taking something back or removing oneself. The correct spelling for the noun meaning the act of taking money out of an account, removing troops, or retreating is "Withdrawal". The spelling "Witdrawl" is missing the letter 'h' after 't' and has 'l' instead of 'al' at the end. Identifying the Incorrectly Spelt Word Based on our analysis, the words "Cerebral", "Arbitrary", and "Scrutinize" are all spelt correctly. The word "Witdrawl" is not the standard or correct spelling of the intended word, which should be "Withdrawal". Therefore, "Witdrawl" is the incorrectly spelt word. The correct spelling of "Witdrawl" is Withdrawal. Word as Given Correct Spelling Is it Incorrectly Spelt? Cerebral Cerebral No Arbitrary Arbitrary No Scrutinize Scrutinize No Witdrawl Withdrawal Yes Conclusion on Spelling Errors The question asks for the INCORRECTLY spelt word. Comparing the options with their correct spellings, we find that "Witdrawl" is the one that is misspelt. The correct answer identifies "Witdrawl" as the incorrectly spelt word. Revision Table: Checking Spellings Given Word Standard Spelling Meaning Cerebral Cerebral Relating to the brain; intellectual. Arbitrary Arbitrary Based on random choice or personal whim, rather than any reason or system. Scrutinize Scrutinize Examine or inspect closely and thoroughly. Witdrawl Withdrawal The act of taking money out of an account; removal of something; retreat. Additional Information: Common Spelling Mistakes & Vocabulary Spelling mistakes are common in English due to its complex history and inconsistent rules. Words like "withdrawal" can sometimes be tricky because they involve consonant clusters and suffixes. Here are some tips to improve spelling: Read regularly to see words used in context. Use a dictionary or spell checker when unsure. Learn common prefixes and suffixes (like 'with-' and '-al'). Practice writing words you often misspell. Break down long words into syllables. Understanding the meaning of vocabulary words like Cerebral, Arbitrary, and Scrutinize also helps reinforce their correct spelling as you use them.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 82archived

Select the INCORRECTLY spelt word.

  1. A
    Moisture
  2. B
    Vishious
  3. C
    Mimic
  4. D
    Anxious
Show answer
B. Vishious

Identifying Incorrectly Spelt Words The question asks us to identify the word that is spelt incorrectly among the given options. To do this, we need to examine each word and check its correct spelling. Analysing the Options Let's look at each word provided: Moisture: This word refers to liquid in the form of tiny drops or a wet surface. The spelling 'Moisture' is correct. Vishious: Let's consider this word. Does it look right? The word related to being cruel or violent is typically spelt differently. Mimic: This word means to imitate someone or something, especially in order to entertain or ridicule. The spelling 'Mimic' is correct. Anxious: This word describes feeling worried, nervous, or uneasy about something uncertain. The spelling 'Anxious' is correct. Finding the Error Upon reviewing the words, 'Vishious' stands out as a potential misspelling. The correct spelling of the word meaning cruel, violent, or deliberately hurtful is 'Vicious'. Therefore, 'Vishious' is the incorrectly spelt word. Correct Spelling The correct spelling of 'Vishious' is Vicious. Revision Table: Common Spelling Errors Common Misspelling Correct Spelling Notes recieve receive 'i' before 'e' except after 'c' rule applies. beleive believe 'i' before 'e' rule applies. occassion occasion Single 's'. neccessary necessary One 'c', two 's's. definately definitely Contains 'i'. Additional Information: Improving Your Spelling Good spelling is important for clear communication. Here are some tips to improve your spelling skills: Read Regularly: Reading exposes you to correctly spelt words and helps you remember how they look. Use a Dictionary: When in doubt, always look up the word in a dictionary or use an online dictionary tool. Learn Common Rules: Familiarise yourself with basic spelling rules (like 'i before e'). Practice Writing: The more you write, the more you reinforce correct spellings. Use Flashcards: Create flashcards for words you often misspell. Proofread: Always read through your writing to catch any errors. Reading aloud can sometimes help identify mistakes.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 83archived

Select the most appropriate ANTONYM of the given word. Invade

  1. A
    Surrender
  2. B
    Attack
  3. C
    Seize
  4. D
    Assault
Show answer
A. Surrender

Understanding the Antonym of 'Invade' The question asks us to find the most appropriate antonym for the word 'Invade'. An antonym is a word that means the opposite of another word. Let's analyze the meaning of 'Invade' and the given options. What does 'Invade' mean? The word 'Invade' typically means to enter a place or territory in large numbers, especially with an army, in order to occupy it or wage war. It implies an aggressive act of taking control or entering without permission, often forcefully. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the meanings of the given options: Surrender: This means to cease resistance to an enemy or opponent and submit to their authority. It is the act of giving up control or yielding to another force. Attack: This means to take aggressive action against a place or people. This is very similar in meaning to 'Invade', often a part of an invasion. Seize: This means to take hold of something suddenly and forcibly. When applied to territory, it means to take possession of it by force. This is also closely related to 'Invade'. Assault: This means to make a concentrated attack on a fortified place or person. Like 'Attack' and 'Seize', this is an act of aggression and is often associated with invading. Identifying the Antonym for 'Invade' We are looking for a word that is the opposite of entering and taking control or waging war. 'Surrender' means giving up control and submitting to another's authority, which is the direct opposite of taking control through invasion. The other options ('Attack', 'Seize', 'Assault') are all actions that are similar to or components of an invasion. Therefore, 'Surrender' is the most appropriate antonym for 'Invade'. Conclusion Based on the meanings of the words, 'Surrender' is the opposite action of 'Invade'. While invading involves taking control or entering forcefully, surrendering involves giving up control or yielding. Word Meanings Comparison Word Meaning Relationship to 'Invade' Invade Enter a place forcefully to take control/wage war The main word Surrender Cease resistance, submit to authority Opposite action Attack Aggressive action Similar action Seize Take possession by force Similar action Assault Concentrated attack Similar action Revision Table: Antonyms and Synonyms Understanding antonyms and synonyms is crucial for vocabulary building. Here is a quick table related to the words discussed: Related Words Word Synonyms Antonyms Invade Attack, Assault, Seize, Occupy, Encroach Surrender, Retreat, Withdraw, Defend Surrender Yield, Capitulate, Submit, Give up Resist, Fight, Conquer, Invade Additional Information on Word Relationships Words can have various relationships: Synonyms: Words with similar meanings (e.g., happy, joyful). Antonyms: Words with opposite meanings (e.g., hot, cold). Homonyms: Words that sound the same or are spelled the same but have different meanings (e.g., bear/bare, bank/bank). Hyponyms: A word that is a specific instance of a more general word (e.g., 'dog' is a hyponym of 'animal'). Hypernyms: A word that is more general than another word (e.g., 'animal' is a hypernym of 'dog'). In this question, we focused on finding the antonym of 'Invade', which is 'Surrender'. Recognizing these relationships helps in expanding vocabulary and improving comprehension.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 84archived

Select the most appropriate option to substitute the underlined segment in the given sentence. If no substitution is required, select ‘No substitution’. The place is too much noisy.

  1. A
    No substitution
  2. B
    much too much noisy
  3. C
    much noisy
  4. D
    too noisy
Show answer
D. too noisy

Understanding Grammar: Correcting "Too Much Noisy" The question asks for the most appropriate substitution for the underlined segment "too much noisy" in the sentence, "The place is too much noisy." To answer this correctly, we need to understand the proper usage of "too much" and "too" with adjectives. Analyzing the Grammatical Error: "Too Much Noisy" The phrase "too much noisy" is grammatically incorrect in standard English. Here's why: "Too much" is typically used with uncountable nouns to indicate an excessive quantity. For example, "too much noise," "too much sugar," "too much information." "Too many" is used with countable nouns to indicate an excessive number. For example, "too many cars," "too many questions," "too many people." "Too" followed by an adjective or an adverb indicates an excessive degree of the quality described by the adjective or adverb. For example, "too noisy," "too loud," "too quickly," "too slowly." In the original sentence, "noisy" is an adjective describing the place. Therefore, we need a structure that correctly modifies an adjective to show excessiveness. The correct structure is "too" + adjective. Evaluating the Options for Substitution Let's examine the given options to see which one correctly substitutes "too much noisy": No substitution: This option suggests the original sentence is correct. As discussed above, "too much noisy" is incorrect grammar. Therefore, substitution is required. much too much noisy: This phrase is highly redundant and grammatically incorrect. "Much too" is a valid phrase (meaning "very much too"), but adding another "much noisy" after it creates an incorrect construction. much noisy: While "much" can modify adjectives in certain contexts (like comparatives, e.g., "much happier"), it is not used directly before a base adjective like "noisy" to mean "excessively" or "very." This option is incorrect. too noisy: This option uses the correct structure "too" + adjective ("noisy"). This construction correctly indicates that the place is excessively noisy. This aligns with standard English grammar rules for modifying adjectives to show an excessive degree. Based on the grammatical analysis, the correct and most appropriate substitution for "too much noisy" is "too noisy". Let's look at the correct structure compared to the incorrect one: Correct Structure Incorrect Usage Example Too + Adjective/Adverb Too much + Adjective/Adverb The place is too noisy. (Correct) Too much + Uncountable Noun Too + Uncountable Noun There is too much noise. (Correct) Therefore, the sentence "The place is too much noisy" should be corrected to "The place is too noisy." Revision Table: Understanding "Too" and "Too Much" Phrase Usage Example Too + Adjective Indicates an excessive degree of the adjective's quality. The coffee is too hot to drink. Too + Adverb Indicates an excessive degree of the adverb's quality. He speaks too quickly. Too much + Uncountable Noun Indicates an excessive quantity of an uncountable noun. There is too much traffic today. Too many + Countable Noun (Plural) Indicates an excessive number of countable nouns. There are too many people here. Additional Information: Related Grammar Concepts Understanding related intensifiers and modifiers can further clarify this point: Very: Used to intensify adjectives and adverbs (e.g., very noisy, very quickly). It doesn't carry the negative connotation of "too." Much: Can modify comparatives (much faster, much louder) or be used in phrases like "very much" (very much appreciated). It generally doesn't modify base adjectives directly in this context. Much too: This phrase means "very much too" and is used before adjectives or adverbs (e.g., "The music is much too loud"). It emphasizes the excessive degree denoted by "too." While grammatically correct, "too noisy" is a more common and direct correction for "too much noisy." The option "much too much noisy" was incorrect due to the repetition and incorrect structure. Mastering the correct use of "too," "too much," and "too many" is essential for accurate English sentence construction. Always remember that "too" precedes adjectives and adverbs to show excessiveness, while "too much" and "too many" precede nouns (uncountable and countable, respectively) to show excessive quantity or number.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 85archived

Select the most appropriate synonym of the given word. Transmit

  1. A
    Accept
  2. B
    Catch
  3. C
    Convey
  4. D
    Receive
Show answer
C. Convey

Synonym Identification for 'Transmit' This question requires finding a word that has a similar meaning (a synonym) to the given word, Transmit. Understanding the Meaning of 'Transmit' The word Transmit primarily means to send out signals, sounds, messages, information, or data from one place or person to another. It can also mean to pass on something, like a disease or a quality, from one entity to another. Essentially, it involves the action of sending or passing something along. Analysis of Potential Synonyms for 'Transmit' Let's examine the provided options to see which one best matches the meaning of Transmit: Accept: This word means to receive willingly or agree to take something. It signifies gaining possession, which is the opposite of sending or transmitting. Therefore, 'Accept' is not a synonym for 'Transmit'. Catch: This word typically means to capture something, often after it has been thrown or dropped. In the context of information or signals, 'Catch' might imply receiving, but it doesn't convey the act of sending. So, 'Catch' is not a suitable synonym. Convey: This word means to transport or carry something from one place to another, or to make an idea, impression, or feeling known or understandable to someone. This aligns well with the meaning of sending or passing information or signals, making it a strong candidate for a synonym of Transmit. Receive: This word means to be given, sent, or delivered something. It is the action of getting something that has been sent. 'Receive' is the direct opposite of 'Transmit'. Conclusion on the Synonym for 'Transmit' Based on the analysis, the word Convey shares the core meaning of sending or passing something along, similar to Transmit. While 'Transmit' often relates specifically to signals or data, 'Convey' captures the general sense of transmission effectively.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 86archived

Select the most appropriate ANTONYM of the given word. Toxic

  1. A
    Healthy
  2. B
    Lethal
  3. C
    Harmful
  4. D
    Venomous
Show answer
A. Healthy

Understanding the Term Toxic and Finding its Antonym The question asks us to identify the most appropriate antonym for the given word, "Toxic". Let's first understand what the word "Toxic" means. The word "Toxic" generally means acting as or containing poison; poisonous. It can also mean very harmful or unpleasant in a pervasive or insidious way. In simpler terms, something toxic is bad for you, often causing harm or illness. An antonym is a word that means the opposite of another word. Now let's examine the given options to find the word that means the opposite of "Toxic". Healthy: This word describes something that is good for your health, promoting well-being, or free from disease. This is the opposite of causing harm or being poisonous. Lethal: This word means sufficient to cause death. A lethal substance is one that can kill you. This is very similar in meaning to toxic; in fact, something toxic can often be lethal. Harmful: This word means causing or likely to cause damage or injury. This is a synonym for toxic. Venomous: This word describes an animal that produces venom and injects it, or something containing venom. Venom itself is a type of poison, so this word is closely related in meaning to toxic. Comparing the options, "Healthy" is the word that represents the complete opposite of "Toxic". While toxic substances cause harm and are detrimental to health, healthy things promote good health and well-being. Analysing the Options Let's look at why the other options are incorrect: Lethal: This implies the severity of toxicity (causing death), not the opposite of being harmful. Harmful: This is a synonym of toxic, meaning it causes damage or injury. Venomous: This is a specific type of toxicity related to venom-producing organisms, also representing a harmful quality, not its opposite. Therefore, "Healthy" is the most appropriate antonym for "Toxic". Conclusion Based on the definitions and comparisons, the word that is most opposite in meaning to "Toxic" is "Healthy". Word Meaning Relationship to "Toxic" Toxic Poisonous; harmful; detrimental to health. Base word Healthy Good for health; promoting well-being; not harmful. Antonym Lethal Causing death. Related (can be a consequence of toxicity) Harmful Causing damage or injury. Synonym Venomous Producing or containing venom (poison). Related (a type of toxicity) Revision Table: Vocabulary Building Reviewing antonyms and synonyms helps build a strong vocabulary. Understanding the nuances between related words like toxic, lethal, harmful, and venomous is crucial for precise language use. Additional Information: Antonyms and Synonyms Antonyms are words with opposite meanings (e.g., hot vs. cold, up vs. down). Synonyms are words with similar meanings (e.g., happy vs. joyful, big vs. large). Learning these relationships helps improve comprehension and expression in English.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 87archived

Select the option that can be used as a one-word substitute for the given group of words. A person who listens to someone’s private conversation without them knowing

  1. A
    Infiltrator
  2. B
    Spy
  3. C
    Eavesdropper
  4. D
    Secret Agent
Show answer
C. Eavesdropper

Understanding the Term for Secret Listening The question asks us to find a single word that describes a person who listens to someone else's private conversation without their knowledge or permission. This is a common vocabulary question that tests our understanding of specific English terms. Analyzing the Given Options Let's look at the options provided and determine which one best fits the definition of a person who secretly listens to private conversations: Infiltrator: An infiltrator is someone who secretly enters or joins an organization, group, or place to obtain information or cause disruption. While they operate secretly, their primary action is entering or joining, not specifically listening to conversations. Spy: A spy is a person who secretly obtains information about an enemy or competitor, typically for a government or other organization. Spying can involve listening, but it's a broader term that encompasses many methods of gathering information. Eavesdropper: An eavesdropper is specifically a person who secretly listens to the private conversation of others without their consent. The act is called eavesdropping. This definition directly matches the group of words given in the question. Secret Agent: Similar to a spy, a secret agent is a person who works secretly for a government or other organization, often involved in intelligence gathering or covert operations. This is a broader role than just secretly listening to conversations. Identifying the Correct Word Substitute Based on the analysis of the options, the term that precisely describes a person who listens to someone's private conversation without them knowing is 'Eavesdropper'. The act of listening secretly to private conversations is called eavesdropping, and the person performing this act is an eavesdropper. Comparison of Terms Let's summarize the key differences between the terms: Term Primary Action Focus on Listening to Private Conversations? Infiltrator Secretly entering/joining Not the primary focus Spy Secretly gathering information (broad) Can include, but not limited to, listening Eavesdropper Secretly listening to private conversations Directly matches the definition Secret Agent Secretly operating for intelligence/covert action Can include, but not limited to, listening Therefore, 'Eavesdropper' is the most accurate one-word substitute for the given group of words describing a person who listens to someone’s private conversation without them knowing. Revision Table: Vocabulary Related to Secret Actions Word Meaning Example Usage Eavesdropper A person who secretly listens to private conversations. The old woman was a notorious eavesdropper, always listening through her neighbour's wall. Infiltrator Someone who secretly enters or joins an organization/group. Police identified the infiltrator who had joined the protest group. Spy A person who secretly obtains information, typically for a government or organization. He was accused of being a spy for a foreign power. Secret Agent A person who carries out secret missions for a government or organization. The movie was about a daring secret agent. Informant A person who gives information to another, especially to the police or authorities. The police arrested the suspects based on information from an informant. Additional Information: Etymology of Eavesdropper The word 'eavesdropper' has an interesting origin. It comes from 'eavesdrop', which originally meant to stand under the eaves of a house to listen to conversations happening inside. The 'eavesdrip' was the water that dripped off the eaves. So, someone standing close enough to be in the 'eavesdrip' was likely trying to overhear something. Understanding word origins can sometimes help in remembering their meanings. The action of secretly listening to private conversations is specifically termed 'eavesdropping', making 'eavesdropper' the correct word for the person doing it.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 88archived

Select the most appropriate meaning of the given idiom. Full of beans

  1. A
    Full of cowardice
  2. B
    Full of energy
  3. C
    A dish made of French beans
  4. D
    A storeroom full of vegetables
Show answer
B. Full of energy

Understanding the Idiom "Full of Beans" Let's break down the meaning of the idiom "Full of beans" and evaluate the given options. An idiom is a phrase or expression that typically presents a figurative, non-literal meaning attached to the phrase; it is not obvious from the words taken literally. The idiom "Full of beans" is commonly used to describe someone who is very lively, energetic, or enthusiastic. Analyzing the Options for "Full of Beans" We will now look at each option to determine which one best fits the idiomatic meaning of "Full of beans". Option 1: Full of cowardice Cowardice means a lack of bravery. This is the opposite of being lively and energetic. So, this option is incorrect. Option 2: Full of energy Being full of energy means being active, lively, and enthusiastic. This aligns perfectly with the common meaning of the idiom "Full of beans". Option 3: A dish made of French beans This is a literal interpretation of the word "beans". Idioms have figurative meanings, so this literal meaning is not the correct interpretation of the idiom. Option 4: A storeroom full of vegetables This is another literal interpretation related to the word "beans" as a type of vegetable. This does not represent the figurative meaning of the idiom. Determining the Most Appropriate Meaning Based on the analysis, the most appropriate meaning of the idiom "Full of beans" is to be full of energy. Idiom Meaning Correct Option Full of beans Energetic and lively Full of energy Therefore, the option that correctly captures the meaning of the idiom "Full of beans" is "Full of energy". Revision Table: Key Idioms Idiom Meaning Example Usage Break a leg Good luck "You have a performance tonight? Break a leg!" Bite the bullet Face a difficult situation with courage "I don't want to work extra hours, but I'll just have to bite the bullet." Get out of hand Become uncontrollable "The party got a little out of hand." Additional Information on English Idioms Idioms are an important part of the English language. They make language more colorful and expressive. Understanding idioms is crucial for comprehending native speakers and improving fluency. Idioms often have historical origins, but their modern meaning may be different from the literal interpretation. Using idioms correctly shows a good grasp of the language. Many idioms are specific to a particular culture or region. Learning common idioms like "Full of beans" enhances vocabulary and improves communication skills.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 89archived

Select the most appropriate synonym of the given word. Numerous

  1. A
    Several
  2. B
    Totalled
  3. C
    Numbered
  4. D
    Few
Show answer
A. Several

Understanding the Word Numerous The question asks us to find the most appropriate synonym for the word "Numerous". A synonym is a word that has the same or nearly the same meaning as another word. Let's first understand the meaning of "Numerous". Numerous: Meaning a large number; many. It suggests a quantity that is considerable or plentiful. Now let's look at the given options and analyze their meanings in relation to "Numerous". Several: Meaning more than two but not many; a number of. This word indicates a quantity that is more than a few but not necessarily a very large number. Totalled: This is the past tense of "total", meaning to add up amounts or numbers to find the total number or amount. It refers to the act of summing things up, not the quantity itself. Numberred: This appears to be a misspelling of "Numbered". If we assume it means "Numbered", it refers to something that has been assigned a number or is part of a numbered sequence. It does not describe the quantity itself. Few: Meaning a small number of. This is the opposite or antonym of "Numerous", which means a large number. Comparing Options to Find the Best Synonym for Numerous We are looking for a word that means "many" or "a large number". Let's compare our options: "Totalled" refers to the process of summing, not the quantity. "Numbered" refers to being assigned a number or being in a sequence, not the quantity. "Few" means a small number, which is the opposite of "Numerous". "Several" means more than two but not necessarily a very large number. While "Several" suggests a smaller quantity than "Numerous" often implies, it is the only option that denotes a quantity greater than "few" and is not related to summing or sequencing. In the context of synonyms, "Several" is the closest option among those provided that indicates a quantity without being an antonym or unrelated concept. Therefore, "Several" is the most appropriate synonym among the given choices, as it is the only word that describes a quantity and fits within the general range of meaning associated with "Numerous", even if "Numerous" often suggests a larger quantity than "Several". Revision Table: Numerous Synonym Analysis Word Meaning Relationship to "Numerous" Numerous A large number; many Target word Several More than two but not many; a number of Closest synonym among options Totalled Summed up Unrelated meaning Numberred (Numbered) Assigned a number; in sequence Unrelated meaning Few A small number Antonym Additional Information on Synonyms and Vocabulary Understanding synonyms is crucial for building vocabulary and improving comprehension and expression. Synonyms often have slightly different connotations or are used in specific contexts. For example, while "Numerous" and "Many" are very close synonyms, you might use "Numerous examples" but "Many people". When looking for the best synonym, it's important to consider not just the basic meaning but also the nuance and typical usage of the word. In multiple-choice questions like this, you need to select the best fit from the given options, even if a more perfect synonym exists outside the choices. Other synonyms for "Numerous" could include "many", "plentiful", "abundant", "countless" (if the number is very large), etc. However, among the options provided, "Several" is the only viable synonym.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 90archived

Select the most appropriate meaning of the given idiom. To cut a long story short

  1. A
    Like to tell long stories
  2. B
    Tell something briefly
  3. C
    Like to tell short stories
  4. D
    Tell something in a roundabout way
Show answer
B. Tell something briefly

Understanding the Idiom: To Cut a Long Story Short The idiom "To cut a long story short" is a common phrase used in English conversation. Understanding idioms is important because their meaning is not always obvious from the individual words. Meaning of the Idiom When someone says "To cut a long story short," they are indicating that they are about to summarize or tell the main points of a story or explanation without going into all the details. They are essentially skipping the less important parts to get directly to the conclusion or the most significant outcome. Think of it like editing a long piece of writing down to a short summary. You remove the unnecessary parts and keep only what is essential for the listener or reader to understand the core message or event. Analyzing the Options Let's examine the given options in relation to the meaning of "To cut a long story short": Option 1: Like to tell long stories This option suggests a preference for telling detailed, lengthy narratives. This is the opposite of cutting a story short, which aims for brevity. Therefore, this option is incorrect. Option 2: Tell something briefly This option perfectly matches the intention of using the idiom "To cut a long story short." It means to provide a concise or short version of events, focusing on the essential facts. This is the correct meaning. Option 3: Like to tell short stories This option describes a general preference for short stories, perhaps in terms of reading or writing. It doesn't capture the act of summarizing a *specific* long story or explanation to make it brief for the current situation. While related to brevity, it's not the precise meaning of the idiom. Thus, this option is incorrect. Option 4: Tell something in a roundabout way To tell something in a roundabout way means to explain it indirectly, taking a long time to reach the main point. This is the opposite of being brief and getting straight to the point, which is what "To cut a long story short" implies. Therefore, this option is incorrect. Conclusion Based on the analysis of the idiom and the options, the most appropriate meaning of "To cut a long story short" is to tell something briefly. Idiom Meaning To cut a long story short To tell something briefly; to summarize the essential points Revision Table: Common Idioms Idiom Meaning Example Usage Break a leg Good luck (especially before a performance) "You have a big interview today? Break a leg!" Bite the bullet To face a difficult or unpleasant situation with courage "I didn't want to work overtime, but I had to bite the bullet and finish the project." Get something off your chest To express something that has been worrying or annoying you for a long time "Thanks for listening, I really needed to get that off my chest." Additional Information: Why Study Idioms? Studying idioms is crucial for several reasons, especially when learning English: Improved Comprehension: Idioms are used frequently in everyday conversation, literature, movies, and music. Understanding them helps you grasp the full meaning of what you hear or read. Enhanced Fluency: Using idioms correctly can make your English sound more natural and fluent, helping you communicate more effectively with native speakers. Cultural Insight: Many idioms are rooted in culture, history, or specific activities. Learning them can offer insights into the cultural background of English speakers. Vocabulary Expansion: Idioms add richness and variety to your vocabulary, providing new ways to express ideas. Remember that the meaning of an idiom is usually figurative, not literal. For instance, "To cut a long story short" doesn't involve physically cutting anything; it's about reducing the length of a narrative.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 91archived

Select the option that expresses the given sentence in reported speech. "Whom did you see at the shopping mall today?” I asked my daughter.

  1. A
    I asked my daughter that whom did she saw at the shopping mall that day.
  2. B
    I asked my daughter who she has seen at the shopping mall today.
  3. C
    I asked my daughter that whom she saw at the shopping mall on that day.
  4. D
    I asked my daughter whom she had seen at the shopping mall that day.
Show answer
D. I asked my daughter whom she had seen at the shopping mall that day.

Understanding Reported Speech: Transforming Questions The question asks us to convert a sentence from direct speech into reported speech. The original sentence is an interrogative sentence (a question) spoken directly by 'I' to 'my daughter'. The direct speech sentence is: “Whom did you see at the shopping mall today?” I asked my daughter. Converting direct speech to reported speech involves several changes: The reporting verb (here, 'asked') is used. If the direct speech is a question starting with a 'wh' word (like whom, who, what, where, when, why), that 'wh' word is used as the conjunction. We do not use 'that'. The sentence structure changes from a question (verb before subject or using auxiliaries like 'did') to a statement (subject before verb). The tense of the verb usually changes (often moving one step back in time). Pronouns may change to reflect the change in speaker and listener. Time and place expressions may change (e.g., 'today' becomes 'that day', 'here' becomes 'there', 'now' becomes 'then'). Applying the Rules to the Given Sentence Let's break down the transformation of the sentence “Whom did you see at the shopping mall today?” I asked my daughter: Reporting Verb: 'I asked my daughter' remains the same. Conjunction: The 'wh' word is 'Whom'. This will be used to connect the reporting clause to the reported clause. Sentence Structure: The question "did you see" needs to become a statement structure. The subject is "you" (referring to my daughter), and the verb is "see". Pronoun Change: "you" (referring to my daughter) becomes "she". Tense Change: The direct speech verb is "did see", which is Past Simple. When converting Past Simple in direct speech to reported speech, it typically changes to Past Perfect. The Past Perfect form of "see" is "had seen". Time Expression Change: "today" changes to "that day" in reported speech. Putting these changes together, the reported speech sentence should be: I asked my daughter whom she had seen at the shopping mall that day. Evaluating the Options for Reported Speech Now let's look at the given options and see which one correctly applies these rules: Option 1: I asked my daughter that whom did she saw at the shopping mall that day. Uses 'that whom' - incorrect (should be just 'whom'). Uses 'did she saw' - incorrect question structure and incorrect verb form ('saw' instead of 'see' or 'seen' after 'did'). Uses 'that day' - correct. This option is incorrect. Option 2: I asked my daughter who she has seen at the shopping mall today. Uses 'who' instead of 'whom' - acceptable in modern English, but 'whom' is used in the original sentence. Uses 'has seen' (Present Perfect) - incorrect tense change (should be Past Perfect 'had seen'). Uses 'today' - incorrect time expression change (should be 'that day'). This option is incorrect. Option 3: I asked my daughter that whom she saw at the shopping mall on that day. Uses 'that whom' - incorrect (should be just 'whom'). Uses 'she saw' (Past Simple) - incorrect tense change (should be Past Perfect 'had seen'). Uses 'on that day' - 'on' is not strictly necessary but 'that day' is correct. This option is incorrect. Option 4: I asked my daughter whom she had seen at the shopping mall that day. Uses 'whom' - correct as used in the original. Uses 'she had seen' (subject + Past Perfect verb) - correct structure and tense change from Past Simple. Uses 'at the shopping mall' - correct. Uses 'that day' - correct time expression change from 'today'. This option correctly applies all the rules for converting this question into reported speech. Based on the analysis of tense changes, pronoun changes, sentence structure, and time expression changes, Option 4 is the correct reported speech form of the given sentence. Aspect Direct Speech Rule for Reported Speech (Question) Transformation Reporting Clause I asked my daughter Remains largely unchanged I asked my daughter Question Word Whom Used as conjunction (no 'that') whom Subject you Changes according to context (daughter) she Verb Tense did see (Past Simple) Changes to Past Perfect had seen Sentence Structure Question structure (auxiliary/verb before subject) Changes to statement structure (subject before verb) she had seen Time Expression today Changes to that day that day Revision Table: Reported Speech Rules Direct Speech Tense Reported Speech Tense Present Simple Past Simple Present Continuous Past Continuous Present Perfect Past Perfect Past Simple Past Perfect Past Continuous Past Perfect Continuous Future (will) Would Can Could May Might Must / Have to Had to Additional Information on Reported Speech Questions When reporting questions, the conjunction used depends on the type of question: For yes/no questions (e.g., "Are you coming?"), 'if' or 'whether' is used as the conjunction. Example: He asked, "Are you coming?" → He asked if I was coming. For 'wh' questions (e.g., "What is your name?"), the 'wh' word itself acts as the conjunction. Example: She asked, "What is your name?" → She asked what my name was. In both cases, the word order in the reported clause changes to subject + verb, like in a statement, not verb + subject like in a question.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 92archived

Select the option that will improve the underlined part of the sentence. In case no improvement is needed, select 'No improvement required'. I wish I have come an hour sooner.

  1. A
    has
  2. B
    No improvement required
  3. C
    had
  4. D
    will
Show answer
C. had

Understanding the Sentence and the Wish Structure The sentence "I wish I have come an hour sooner" expresses a wish or regret about a past event. The key phrase here is "I wish," which is used to express desires for things that are different from reality. When we express a wish or regret about something that happened (or didn't happen) in the past, we typically use the past perfect tense after 'wish'. Analyzing the Underlined Part: "have come" The underlined part is "have come". This is the present perfect tense. The present perfect is used for actions that started in the past and continue to the present, or for past actions with a result in the present. However, in the context of expressing a wish about a specific past time ("an hour sooner"), the present perfect tense is grammatically incorrect. Evaluating the Options for Improvement Let's look at the given options and see which one correctly fits the grammatical structure for expressing a wish about the past: Option 1: has If we replace "have" with "has", the phrase becomes "has come". This is still the present perfect tense, but "has" is used with third person singular subjects (he, she, it). The subject here is "I", which requires "have". So, "has come" is incorrect both in tense for the context and in subject-verb agreement with "I". Option 2: No improvement required As explained earlier, "have come" is the present perfect tense and is not the correct tense to use after "I wish" when referring to a past event. Therefore, improvement is required. Option 3: had If we replace "have" with "had", the phrase becomes "had come". This is the past perfect tense. The structure "I wish + past perfect" is the correct grammatical way to express a wish or regret about something in the past. The sentence "I wish I had come an hour sooner" correctly conveys the speaker's regret about not arriving earlier. Option 4: will If we replace "have" with "will", the phrase becomes "will come". This forms the future tense. The structure "I wish + would + base verb" or "I wish + past simple" can be used for future wishes or wishes about the present/future, but "will" directly following "I wish I" is generally incorrect, and it definitely does not express a wish about a past event ("an hour sooner"). Based on the analysis of the grammatical rules for expressing wishes about the past, the past perfect tense ("had come") is required. The option that provides "had" allows us to form the correct past perfect tense. The Corrected Sentence Replacing the underlined part with the correct option results in the sentence: "I wish I had come an hour sooner." This sentence correctly expresses a regret about a past action. Revision Table: Understanding 'Wish' Structures Structure Use Example Wish + Past Simple To express a wish about a present situation that is not true. I wish I were taller. (I am not tall) Wish + Past Perfect To express a wish or regret about a past action or situation. I wish I had studied harder for the exam. (I didn't study hard) Wish + Would + Base Verb To express a wish for a future action, or a wish for someone else to do something (often implying annoyance). I wish you would stop making that noise. (I want you to stop now/in the future) Additional Information on Wish Clauses and Subjunctives The use of past tenses after 'wish' (and also after phrases like 'if only') is related to the concept of the subjunctive mood, which is used for hypothetical or unreal situations. While the full subjunctive form (like 'were' instead of 'was' after 'I/he/she/it') is less common in modern English, the principle of using a 'shifted' past tense to indicate unreality remains for expressing wishes. In our example, "I wish I had come an hour sooner," the speaker is describing a situation (coming earlier) that did not happen in the past, hence it is an unreal or hypothetical past situation from the perspective of the wish. This is why the past perfect ("had come") is used, as it is one tense further back from the simple past, reflecting the unreality concerning a past event. Understanding these wish clauses is crucial for expressing regrets, desires, and hypothetical situations correctly in English grammar.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 93archived

Sentences of a paragraph are given below in jumbled order. Arrange the sentences in the right order to form a meaningful and coherent paragraph. A. Then I took him by the hand and led him across the street. B. I was going to the market when I saw a blind man trying to cross the street. C. He expressed his gratitude with folded hands. D. I walked across to the blind man.

  1. A
    ABCD
  2. B
    BDAC
  3. C
    CBDA
  4. D
    DABC
Show answer
B. BDAC

The correct answer is ' BDAC '. Key Points While carefully reading all the statements, it is clear that sentence B is the introductory statement. Sentence B will come in the first place because it is introducing us to the fact that the person saw a blind man crossing the street. Sentence D will come in the second place because it is telling us that on seeing a blind man crossing the road, he walked to that blind man. Sentence A will come in the third place because it is telling us that after he reached the blind man, he took him by the hand and led him across the street. Sentence C will come in the last place because it is telling us that the blind man expressed his gratitude with folded hands because the author had helped him. Therefore the most appropriate sequence is ' BDAC '. Hence, option 2 is the correct answer. The correct sequence is: I was going to the market when I saw a blind man trying to cross the street. I walked across to the blind man. Then I took him by the hand and led him across the street. He expressed his gratitude with folded hands. Additional Information ' Gratitude ' means the quality of being thankful; readiness to show appreciation for and to return kindness. (कृतज्ञता) Example : She expressed her gratitude to the committee for their support.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 94archived

Select the option that expresses the given sentence in passive voice. Someone stole his traveller's cheques when he was travelling in Europe.

  1. A
    His traveller's cheques was stole when he was travelling in Europe.
  2. B
    Someone had been stole his traveller's cheques when he was travelling in Europe.
  3. C
    His traveller's cheques were stolen when he was travelling in Europe.
  4. D
    His traveller's cheques are stole when he was travelling in Europe.
Show answer
C. His traveller's cheques were stolen when he was travelling in Europe.

Converting Active Voice to Passive Voice The question asks us to convert the given sentence from active voice to passive voice. The original sentence is: "Someone stole his traveller's cheques when he was travelling in Europe." Understanding Active and Passive Voice In active voice, the subject performs the action. In passive voice, the subject receives the action. The structure of a passive sentence involves a form of the verb 'to be' followed by the past participle of the main verb. The general structure is: Active: Subject + Verb + Object Passive: Object + form of 'to be' + Past Participle of Verb + (by + Subject - optional) Analyzing the Given Sentence Let's break down the original sentence: Subject: Someone Verb: stole (Past Simple tense) Object: his traveller's cheques Adverbial Clause: when he was travelling in Europe (This part describes when the action happened and usually stays the same in the passive voice). Converting to Passive Voice To convert this sentence to passive voice, we follow these steps: The object of the active sentence ("his traveller's cheques") becomes the subject of the passive sentence. The verb form changes. The active verb is "stole", which is in the Past Simple tense. The passive structure for Past Simple is 'was' or 'were' + Past Participle. The new subject "his traveller's cheques" is plural, so we need to use "were". The past participle of "stole" is "stolen". Combine step 3 and 4: The passive verb phrase is "were stolen". The original subject "Someone" is often omitted in passive voice when it's unknown or unimportant. We will omit it here. The adverbial clause "when he was travelling in Europe" remains at the end. Putting it together, the passive sentence is: "His traveller's cheques were stolen when he was travelling in Europe." Evaluating the Options Let's examine the given options based on our conversion: Option 1: "His traveller's cheques was stole when he was travelling in Europe." This is incorrect. "Traveller's cheques" is plural, so it requires "were", not "was". Also, the past participle of "steal" is "stolen", not "stole". Option 2: "Someone had been stole his traveller's cheques when he was travelling in Europe." This is incorrect. The subject is still "Someone", which means it's not in passive voice. The verb tense "had been stole" is also incorrect for this situation and is not the passive form of Past Simple. Option 3: "His traveller's cheques were stolen when he was travelling in Europe." This matches our calculated passive sentence structure and verb form. "His traveller's cheques" (plural subject) + "were stolen" (Past Simple passive verb) + rest of the sentence. This is the correct passive voice conversion. Option 4: "His traveller's cheques are stole when he was travelling in Europe." This is incorrect. "Are stole" uses the present tense form of 'to be' ("are"), but the original sentence verb "stole" was in the Past Simple. Also, the past participle should be "stolen", not "stole". Therefore, Option 3 is the correct answer. Correct Passive Sentence The correct passive voice conversion of "Someone stole his traveller's cheques when he was travelling in Europe" is "His traveller's cheques were stolen when he was travelling in Europe." Revision Table: Active vs. Passive Voice Feature Active Voice Passive Voice Focus Subject performing the action Action or the object receiving the action Structure (Simple) Subject + Verb + Object Object + form of 'be' + Past Participle (+ by Subject) Example (Past Simple) Someone stole the cheques. The cheques were stolen (by someone). Use Case When the doer is important or known When the action or receiver is more important, or the doer is unknown/unimportant Additional Information on Voice Change Changing the voice of a sentence means changing whether the subject is performing the action (active voice) or receiving the action (passive voice). The tense of the verb must remain the same when converting between active and passive voice. Key points to remember for passive voice: Identify the tense of the active verb first. This determines the form of the 'be' verb you will use in the passive structure. The object of the active sentence becomes the subject of the passive sentence. Ensure the form of 'be' agrees with this new subject in number (singular/plural). Always use the past participle of the main verb in the passive voice, regardless of the tense. The original subject can be included in a "by..." phrase, but it is often omitted, especially if it's a general pronoun like "someone," "somebody," "people," or if the doer is unknown or irrelevant. Not all verbs can be made passive. Transitive verbs (verbs that take a direct object) can usually be made passive. Intransitive verbs (verbs that do not take a direct object) cannot.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 95archived

The following sentence has been divided into parts. One of them contains an error. Select the part that contains the error from the given options. It have been only / through writing / that men have been able / to spread their ideas to mankind.

  1. A
    to spread their ideas to mankind
  2. B
    that men have been able
  3. C
    It have been only
  4. D
    through writing
Show answer
C. It have been only

The correct answer is 'It have been only'. Key Points In the given sentence, the use of ' have been' is incorrect . ' Have ' is used with the pronouns I, you, we, and they . Example : They have two dogs. ' Has ' is used with he, she, and it. Example : She has played cricket for four years. Therefore, in the sentence ' has ' will be used in place of ' have '. Hence, option 3 is the correct answer. The correct sentence is:It has been only through writing that men have been able to spread their ideas to mankind. Additional Information Have and has can indicate possession. Have and has can combine with other verbs to indicate more complex relationships with time.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 96archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number 1.

  1. A
    expand
  2. B
    exchange
  3. C
    narrow
  4. D
    convert
Show answer
A. expand

The question asks us to fill in the blanks in a given passage with the most appropriate words from the options provided. This is a type of cloze test that assesses vocabulary and comprehension skills. Let's focus on filling blank number 1 based on the context of the sentence. Analyzing Blank 1 in the Study Passage The first sentence states: "It is true that the more you study, the more you (1)______ your horizon..." This sentence talks about the effect of studying on one's "horizon". The word "horizon" here is used metaphorically. It refers to the limit of one's knowledge, experience, or interests. The phrase "(1)______ your horizon" describes what happens to this limit as you study more. Evaluating Options for Blank 1 Let's look at the given options for blank (1): expand exchange narrow convert We need to choose the word that best describes how studying affects one's horizon in a positive, growth-oriented sense, as implied by the phrase "the more you study... the more you...". Expand: To expand means to make something larger, wider, or more extensive. If you "expand your horizon", it means you increase the range of your knowledge, understanding, and experience. This aligns perfectly with the idea that studying increases your perspective and knowledge. Exchange: To exchange means to give something and receive something else in return. You can exchange items or ideas, but you don't typically "exchange" a horizon. This word does not fit the context. Narrow: To narrow means to make something smaller or less wide. If you "narrow your horizon", it means you limit your knowledge, understanding, or experience. This is the opposite of what studying generally does; studying usually broadens one's perspective, not limits it. Convert: To convert means to change something from one form to another. You can convert currency or beliefs, but you don't "convert" a horizon. This word is not appropriate for the context. Based on the analysis, "expand" is the only word that logically fits the sentence. Studying more leads to a wider range of knowledge and experience, effectively expanding one's horizon. Therefore, the completed sentence is: "It is true that the more you study, the more you expand your horizon..." Concluding the Answer for Blank 1 The most appropriate option to fill in blank number 1 is 'expand'. This choice accurately reflects the positive impact of studying on one's perspective and understanding of the world. Option Meaning in Context Fit for Blank 1 expand Increase the range of knowledge/experience Best Fit exchange Give and receive something else Doesn't Fit narrow Limit the range of knowledge/experience Opposite Meaning convert Change into a different form Doesn't Fit Revision Table: Key Concepts in Studying and Horizons Concept Explanation Relation to Blank 1 Studying The process of learning and gaining knowledge Increases knowledge and leads to the effect described in the blank. Horizon (Metaphorical) The limit of one's knowledge, understanding, or experience This is what is affected by studying; it gets larger. Expand To make larger or more extensive The action that happens to one's horizon as a result of studying. Additional Information: The Impact of Education The passage highlights the positive impact of education, particularly higher education. Let's briefly explore the themes mentioned: Expanding Horizon: As discussed, studying introduces you to new ideas, cultures, histories, and perspectives, making your view of the world broader. Point of View Undergoes a Change: With a wider horizon, your perspective on various issues naturally evolves. You might become more open-minded, critical, or informed, leading to a transformation in how you see things. (This relates to blank 2 in the passage). Better Perspective and Ideas: Educated individuals often possess more informed perspectives and can contribute valuable ideas to society because of their broader knowledge base. (Relates to blank 3). Community and Societal Development: These informed perspectives and ideas are crucial for progress and improvement within communities and society as a whole. (Relates to blank 4). Global Perspective for the Nation: When people contribute well-informed ideas, it can help shape a nation's overall outlook and standing in the world, giving it a more global perspective. (Relates to blank 5). The passage underscores that education is not just about personal gain but also about contributing to the greater good of society.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 97archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number 2.

  1. A
    backwardness
  2. B
    enlargement
  3. C
    succession
  4. D
    transformation
Show answer
D. transformation

Understanding the Passage and Blank 2 The provided passage discusses the impact of education and studying on a person's perspective and their contribution to society. The first part of the passage states, "It is true that the more you study, the more you (1)______ your horizon and hence your point of view undergoes a (2)______." This sentence establishes a cause-and-effect relationship: studying leads to something happening to your "horizon," which in turn causes something to happen to your "point of view." Blank (1) likely refers to expanding or broadening one's horizon, meaning gaining a wider scope of knowledge and understanding. This broadening of perspective naturally leads to a change in how one views the world or specific issues – their "point of view". We need to find the most appropriate word for blank (2) that describes this change in point of view. Analyzing Options for Blank Number 2: Point of View Change Let's examine the given options for blank number 2: backwardness enlargement succession transformation Consider how studying and broadening one's horizon affect a person's point of view: backwardness: This implies moving towards a worse or less developed state. More studying is generally associated with progress and improvement, not backwardness in one's perspective. This option does not fit the context. enlargement: This means making something larger. While one's 'horizon' might be enlarged or broadened, a 'point of view' doesn't typically undergo 'enlargement'. It changes or evolves, but 'enlargement' isn't the most common or fitting description for the change in a perspective itself. succession: This refers to a series of things following one after another. A point of view doesn't undergo a 'succession'. This term is used for sequences or inheriting titles/positions. This option is irrelevant to the context. transformation: This means a marked change in form, nature, or appearance. When one studies more, they gain new knowledge, challenge existing beliefs, and see things from different angles. This often leads to a significant change or 'transformation' in their point of view. This option accurately describes the profound change that can occur in one's perspective due to increased education and a broadened horizon. Selecting the Most Appropriate Word for Blank 2 Based on the analysis, the word that best describes what happens to a point of view when a person studies more and broadens their horizon is 'transformation'. A deeper understanding of the world fundamentally changes how one perceives and interprets it. The point of view undergoes a significant shift or transformation. Therefore, the most appropriate option for blank number 2 is transformation. Revision Table: Passage Blanks Blank Number Context Clues Most Appropriate Word Reasoning 1 Impact of studying on horizon (Likely broadening/expanding based on Blank 2) Studying increases knowledge, widening one's view. 2 Impact of broadened horizon on point of view Transformation A wider perspective leads to a significant change in viewpoint. Additional Information: The Value of Education Education plays a crucial role in individual development and societal progress. As the passage suggests, it doesn't just provide facts; it shapes how we think and interact with the world. Key benefits include: Broadening Horizons: Learning about different subjects, cultures, and ideas expands one's understanding of the world beyond their immediate experience. Developing Critical Thinking: Education encourages questioning, analyzing information, and forming reasoned opinions, leading to a more nuanced point of view. Enhancing Perspective: Exposure to diverse viewpoints through studying can lead to a more empathetic and comprehensive perspective on complex issues. Enabling Contribution: A well-educated person is often better equipped with the knowledge and skills needed to contribute meaningfully to their community and society, as hinted at in the later part of the passage. Understanding how vocabulary choices reflect these concepts, like 'transformation' for a changed point of view, is essential for comprehending and completing such passages.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 98archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number 3.

  1. A
    scope
  2. B
    luck
  3. C
    outlook
  4. D
    routine
Show answer
C. outlook

Filling Blank 3 in the Passage about Education The question asks us to select the most appropriate word to fill in blank number 3 in the given passage. Let's look at the passage again: It is true that the more you study, the more you (1)______ your horizon and hence your point of view undergoes a (2)______. A person with higher education certainly has a better (3)______ and ideas to help in the community and societal (4)______. Ideas that are gathered from such people provide a global (5)______ for the nation as a whole. We need to focus on the sentence containing blank (3): "A person with higher education certainly has a better (3)______ and ideas to help in the community and societal (4)______." The sentence states that a person with higher education possesses something "better" along with "ideas" that helps in community and societal matters. We need a word for blank (3) that fits this context and logically follows from having higher education. Analyzing Options for Blank 3 Let's examine the given options for blank (3): scope: Scope refers to the extent of an area or subject. While education broadens one's scope of knowledge, saying someone has a "better scope and ideas" isn't the most common or natural phrasing in this context. luck: Luck is related to chance or fortune. Education provides knowledge and skills, not luck. This option does not fit the context of the sentence which discusses the positive effects of higher education on a person's abilities and contributions. outlook: Outlook means a person's point of view or attitude towards life or a situation. Higher education often broadens one's perspective, making their outlook more informed, reasoned, or global. Having a "better outlook and ideas" fits well, as a broader perspective often leads to better ideas for addressing community and societal issues. routine: Routine refers to a fixed sequence of actions. Education might influence a person's daily habits, but it's not the primary thing higher education gives for community help, and "routine and ideas" doesn't form a logical pair in this sentence. Selecting the Best Fit for Blank 3: Outlook Based on the analysis, the word that best fits the context of a person with higher education having something "better" that goes along with "ideas" to help the community is "outlook". Higher education helps shape a person's perspective and way of looking at the world, providing them with a more informed and potentially more positive or effective outlook, which in turn enables them to generate better ideas for societal improvement. Therefore, 'outlook' is the most appropriate choice for blank number 3. Conclusion for Blank 3 The sentence becomes: "A person with higher education certainly has a better outlook and ideas to help in the community and societal (4)______." This sentence flows logically and conveys that education enhances a person's perspective, leading to valuable ideas for contributing to society. Blank Number Sentence Context Most Appropriate Word Reasoning 3 A person with higher education certainly has a better ______ and ideas to help... outlook Education broadens one's perspective (outlook), leading to better ideas for societal contribution. Revision Table: Key Terms Term Meaning in Context Relation to Education Horizon (from blank 1 context) The limit of one's knowledge, experience, or interests. Education expands your horizon. Point of View (from blank 2 context) A particular attitude or way of considering a matter. Education causes your point of view to undergo a change/transformation. Outlook A person's point of view or general attitude towards life or a situation. Higher education improves one's outlook, making it better and more informed. Ideas A thought or suggestion as to a possible course of action. A better outlook from education can lead to better ideas for community/societal help. Additional Information: The Impact of Higher Education Higher education plays a crucial role in shaping individuals and society. Beyond gaining specialized knowledge, it fosters critical thinking skills, broadens perspectives, and encourages intellectual curiosity. This broadening of perspective is what the passage refers to as having a "better outlook". Broadened Perspective: Studying diverse subjects and interacting with people from different backgrounds exposes students to new ideas and ways of thinking, leading to a more comprehensive understanding of the world. Improved Analytical Skills: Higher education teaches individuals how to analyze complex problems, evaluate information, and form reasoned conclusions. Enhanced Communication: Students develop better written and oral communication skills, essential for expressing ideas effectively and engaging in constructive dialogue. Contribution to Society: Equipped with a better outlook and well-developed ideas, educated individuals are often better positioned to contribute positively to their communities, drive innovation, and address societal challenges. These aspects collectively contribute to a person having a "better outlook and ideas" for societal engagement, as highlighted in the passage.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 99archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number 4.

  1. A
    maturity
  2. B
    elaboration
  3. C
    development
  4. D
    ripening
Show answer
C. development

Understanding the Cloze Test Passage The provided passage is a cloze test, where certain words are removed, and we need to select the most appropriate word from the given options to fill each blank. The passage discusses the positive impact of education on an individual's perspective and their contribution to society. Let's look at the passage again with the blanks: It is true that the more you study, the more you (1)______ your horizon and hence your point of view undergoes a (2)______. A person with higher education certainly has a better (3)______ and ideas to help in the community and societal (4)______. Ideas that are gathered from such people provide a global (5)______ for the nation as a whole. We are asked to fill in blank number 4. Analyzing Blank Number 4 Blank number 4 is part of the phrase "community and societal (4)______". This phrase describes the area or process where educated individuals contribute their "outlook and ideas". We need a word that signifies progress, improvement, or advancement for the community and society. Evaluating Options for Blank 4 Let's examine the given options for blank number 4: maturity: This refers to the state of being fully grown or developed. While societies can be said to 'mature' in certain aspects, 'societal maturity' isn't the most common or direct term for the general progress that educated individuals contribute to. elaboration: This means to develop or present something in detail. This word does not fit the context of contributing to community and society. development: This refers to the process of growing or becoming more advanced. 'Community development' and 'societal development' are standard terms used to describe the improvement in the well-being, progress, and structure of communities and societies. This aligns perfectly with the idea of educated people helping in these areas. ripening: This primarily refers to the process of becoming ripe (like fruit) or mature. It is not appropriate for describing societal progress. Determining the Most Appropriate Option Based on the analysis of the options and the context of the phrase "community and societal (4)______", the word that best fits is "development". Educated individuals contribute their ideas and outlook to help in the progress and advancement of their community and society. Option Meaning Fit in Context ("community and societal ______") maturity Fully grown/developed state Possible, but less common/direct for general progress elaboration Detailed development/presentation Does not fit development Process of growing/advancing Best fit (standard term for societal progress) ripening Becoming ripe/mature (often fruit) Does not fit Conclusion The word "development" is the most appropriate choice for blank number 4, completing the phrase to "community and societal development". Revision Table: Key Vocabulary Word Meaning Context in Passage Horizon The limit of a person's knowledge, experience, or interest. Studying expands your horizon. Undergoes Experiences or is subjected to something. Point of view undergoes a change. Outlook A person's point of view or general attitude to life. Educated people have a better outlook. Societal Relating to society or social relations. Contribution to societal development. Global Perspective Understanding issues from a worldwide point of view. Ideas provide a global perspective for the nation. Additional Information: The Role of Education in Societal Development Education is widely recognized as a crucial driver of societal development. It equips individuals with knowledge, skills, and critical thinking abilities necessary to contribute meaningfully to their communities and the larger society. Here's how education fosters development: Economic Growth: An educated workforce is more productive and innovative, leading to economic progress. Health and Well-being: Educated individuals are often more aware of health practices and contribute to better public health outcomes. Civic Engagement: Education promotes informed citizenship and participation in democratic processes. Reduced Inequality: Access to education can help bridge socio-economic gaps. Innovation and Progress: Higher education and research drive scientific and technological advancements that benefit society. Therefore, the concept of educated individuals contributing to "community and societal development" is a core theme in understanding the broader impact of learning.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 100archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number 5.

  1. A
    posture
  2. B
    proportion
  3. C
    perspective
  4. D
    prejudice
Show answer
C. perspective

Analyzing the Cloze Passage and Blank 5 The passage discusses the positive effects of education on an individual and, consequently, on the nation. It highlights how studying broadens one's understanding and changes their viewpoint. People with higher education contribute valuable ideas to society and the nation. We need to choose the most appropriate word for blank number 5 in the sentence: "Ideas that are gathered from such people provide a global (5)______ for the nation as a whole." Evaluating the Options for Blank 5 Let's examine each option and determine its suitability for blank 5: posture: This word typically refers to a physical stance or attitude. It does not fit the context of ideas providing a viewpoint for a nation. proportion: This word relates to a part in relation to a whole or balance. While important, it doesn't convey the idea of understanding or seeing things from a particular viewpoint, especially on a global scale. perspective: This word means a particular attitude toward or way of regarding something; a point of view. This aligns perfectly with the idea that educated people's ideas help the nation understand global matters or see itself within a global context. A global perspective means seeing things from a worldwide viewpoint. prejudice: This word means a preconceived opinion that is not based on reason or actual experience, usually negative. This is the opposite of the positive contribution of ideas from educated people described in the passage. Determining the Most Appropriate Word Considering the options and the context of the sentence, the word that best fits blank 5 is "perspective". The sentence implies that the ideas from educated individuals contribute to giving the nation a better understanding of global affairs or its place in the world, which is precisely what a global perspective provides. Conclusion for Blank 5 Based on the analysis, the most appropriate option to fill blank number 5 is 'perspective'. The completed sentence would be: "Ideas that are gathered from such people provide a global perspective for the nation as a whole." Analysis of Options for Blank 5 Option Meaning Fit in Sentence posture Physical stance/attitude No proportion Part to whole relation/balance No perspective Point of view/way of regarding something Yes prejudice Preconceived negative opinion No Revision Table: Cloze Test Practice Key Takeaways for Cloze Tests Skill Importance Vocabulary Understanding word meanings is crucial. Contextual Understanding Reading the entire passage to grasp the theme is vital. Grammar Identifying the correct part of speech and grammatical form needed for the blank. Elimination Ruling out options that clearly don't fit the meaning or grammar. Additional Information: The Power of Perspective A global perspective is the ability to understand and appreciate different viewpoints, cultures, and global issues. It involves recognizing the interconnectedness of the world and how local actions can have global impacts, and vice versa. Education is often seen as a key way to develop this broader perspective, moving beyond local or narrow viewpoints to a more informed and comprehensive understanding of the world.

Paper & answer key PDF